GOT1000 Series (GT15) MES Function Function Manual HMI

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
GOT 1000
Graphic Operation Terminal
Function Manual
MES Interface
Art. no:
SH(NA)-080654ENG
01102008
Version H
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Always read these precautions before using this product.)
Before using the product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
The precautions given in this manual are concerned with only this product.
In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION".
DANGER
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,
resulting in death or severe injury.
CAUTION
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,
resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.
Note that the
CAUTION level may lead to serious consequences according to the circumstances.
Always follow the precautions of both levels as they are important for personal safety.
Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.
[Design precautions]
DANGER
Before performing the test operation, read this manual carefully to understand the operation
procedure.
Incorrect output or malfunctions may cause an accident.
When the security of the GOT and relevant information need to be protected against illegal access
from an external device via the Internet, take measures at the user's discretion.
Failure to do so may cause the configured information to be read out illegally.
A-1
REVISION
* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print date
* Manual number
Revision
Nov., 2006
SH(NA)-080654ENG-A First edition
Feb., 2007
SH(NA)-080654ENG-B Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2.47Z
Partial additions
Section 3.3, Section 3.4.1, Section 3.4.2, Section 7.2, Section 7.2.5
Partial corrections
Section 1.2, 2.3, 2.4.2, 2.5, 3.1, 5.3, 6.5, 6.5.1, 6.5.2, 6.6.1, 6.7, 6.7.1, 6.8, 6.8.1,
6.8.2, 6.9, 6.9.2, 6.10, 7.6, 7.8.1, 8.2.2, Section 6.10.1 to 6.10.5
Additions
Section 5.1.5, Section 6.10.6, Appendix 5
Section 5.1.5 to 5.1.8
May, 2007
Section 5.16 to 5.1.9
SH(NA)-080654ENG-C Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2.58L
Partial additions
DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS, Section 2.1.1, 2.4.2, 3.1, 3.2,
5.3, 6.6.1, 6.8.1, 6.10.3, 6.10.4, 7.2, 8.2, Appendix 5, 6, INDEX
Partial corrections
Section 6.5, 6.11.2, Appendix 2
Aug., 2007
SH(NA)-080654ENG-D Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.63R
Partial additions
Section 2.1.1
Partial corrections
DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS, Section 4.1, App. 5
Dec., 2007
SH(NA)-080654ENG-E Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.73B
Partial additions
DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS, Section 3.1, 3.3, 6.5.1, 6.6.1,
6.8, 6.11.2, 7.8
Partial additions
Section 5.1.6, 5.1.9, 6.7.1 to 6.7.3, 6.7.5, 6.8.1, 6.8.2, 6.9.2, 7.5, 7.8.1, 7.8.2
Additions
Section 6.5.2
Section 6.5.2
Feb., 2008
Section 6.5.3
SH(NA)-080654ENG-F Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.77F
Partial additions
Section 2.2.1, 6.8.1, 8.1
A -2
* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print date
Jun., 2008
* Manual number
Revision
SH(NA)-080654ENG-G Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.82L
Partial additions
Section 2.4.2, 3.1, 3.3, 5.1.1, 6.5.1, 6.5.3, 6.7.1, 6.8, 7.2, 8.2.1, 8.2.2
Additions
Section 5.1.8, Section 6.8.3, Appendix 3
Section 5.1.8 to 5.1.9
Appendix 4 to 5
Oct., 2008
Section 5.1.9 to 5.1.10,
Appendix 5 to 6
SH(NA)-080654ENG-H Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.90U
Partial additions
Section 1.1, 2.3, 2.5, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 5.1.10, 6.7.1, 6.7.6, 6.9.2, 6.11.2, 8.1, 8.1.1,
8.2.1
Partial additions
Chapter 1, Section 2.2.1, 2.3, App.6
Japanese Manual Version SH-080625-J
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Also,
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may
occur as a result of using the contents in this manual.
2006 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
A-3
CAUTIONS FOR USE
Cautions on the system configuration
(1) GOTs that support the MES interface function
GT16 and GT15 only support the function.
By installing the option OS into a GOT from GT Designer2, the MES interface function
can be used.
For applicable models, refer to the following:
Section 2.2 Connection between GOT and Controllers
(2) Option function board that supports the MES interface function
For the option function board that supports the MES interface function, refer to the following:
Section 2.3 Required Equipment, Software and Option OS
(3) Relational databases that support the MES interface function
For the relational databases that support the MES interface function, refer to the following:
Section 2.4.2 Server computer (SNTP server computer)
(4) Connection type used for the MES interface function
To utilize the MES interface function, the Ethernet connection is used.
Install an Ethernet communication unit, and configure the Ethernet setting in Communication Settings of GT Designer2.
For applicable Ethernet communication units, refer to the following:
Section 2.3 Required Equipment, Software and Option OS
For the Ethernet connection, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
A -4
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (GOT).
Before using the GOT, please read this manual carefully to understand the features and performance for
correct handling.
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................................................A - 1
REVISION .........................................................................................................................................................A - 2
CAUTIONS FOR USE...................................................................................................................................... A - 4
ABOUT MANUALS .......................................................................................................................................... A - 9
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS................................................................................................... A - 10
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL .................................................................................................................... A - 14
DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS ........................................................................................ A - 15
CHAPTER 1
OVERVIEW
1 - 1 to 1 - 7
1.1
Features........................................................................................................................................... 1 - 2
1.2
What is the MES Interface Function? .............................................................................................. 1 - 7
CHAPTER 2
2.1
2 - 1 to 2 - 11
System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 2 - 1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Overall system configuration .................................................................................................... 2 - 1
System configuration when installing software used for the MES Interface Function .............. 2 - 2
Connection between GOT and Controllers...................................................................................... 2 - 3
2.2.1
2.2.2
Connection type used for the MES Interface Function ............................................................. 2 - 3
Precautions for inverter or servo amplifier connection ............................................................. 2 - 5
2.3
Required Equipment, Software and Option OS ............................................................................... 2 - 6
2.4
Operating Environment.................................................................................................................... 2 - 8
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.5
Configuration computer ............................................................................................................ 2 - 8
Server computer (SNTP server computer) ............................................................................... 2 - 9
Cautions on System Configuration ................................................................................................ 2 - 11
CHAPTER 3
SPECIFICATIONS
3 - 1 to 3 - 8
3.1
Performance Specifications ............................................................................................................. 3 - 1
3.2
GOT Devices Available for the MES Interface Function.................................................................. 3 - 3
3.3
Function List and Setting Item List................................................................................................... 3 - 4
3.4
GOT Internal Device (GS) ............................................................................................................... 3 - 6
3.4.1
3.4.2
CHAPTER 4
4.1
GOT internal device list ............................................................................................................ 3 - 6
MES Interface Function area.................................................................................................... 3 - 6
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE USE OF THE MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
4 - 1 to 4 - 4
Settings and Procedures before Use of the MES Interface Function .............................................. 4 - 1
A-5
4.2
Installation and Uninstallation .......................................................................................................... 4 - 4
CHAPTER 5
5.1
MES INTERFACE FUNCTION
5 - 1 to 5 - 26
DB Interface Function ...................................................................................................................... 5 - 1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
5.1.6
5.1.7
5.1.8
5.1.9
5.1.10
DB interface function operation ................................................................................................ 5 - 1
Job execution procedure .......................................................................................................... 5 - 2
Tag function .............................................................................................................................. 5 - 3
Trigger monitoring function ....................................................................................................... 5 - 4
Trigger buffering function.......................................................................................................... 5 - 6
SQL text transmission (Communication action)........................................................................ 5 - 9
Arithmetic processing function (Operation action) .................................................................. 5 - 10
Resource data send function (Resource data send action).................................................... 5 - 11
Program execution function .................................................................................................... 5 - 14
DB buffering function .............................................................................................................. 5 - 15
5.2
SNTP Time Synchronization Function ........................................................................................... 5 - 23
5.3
Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 5 - 24
CHAPTER 6
MES INTERFACE FUNCTION SETTING
6 - 1 to 6 - 110
6.1
MES Interface Function Setting Screen........................................................................................... 6 - 1
6.2
Displaying the MES Interface Function Setting Screen ................................................................... 6 - 1
6.3
Screen Structure .............................................................................................................................. 6 - 2
6.3.1
6.3.2
Screen structure ....................................................................................................................... 6 - 2
Operations using the Edit items tree......................................................................................... 6 - 3
6.4
Setting.............................................................................................................................................. 6 - 5
6.5
Device Tag Settings......................................................................................................................... 6 - 6
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.6
Server Service Settings ................................................................................................................. 6 - 17
6.6.1
6.7
Setting items in Job settings ................................................................................................... 6 - 22
Setting items in Trigger conditions.......................................................................................... 6 - 26
Setting items in Program execution ........................................................................................ 6 - 35
Setting items in DB Buffering.................................................................................................. 6 - 38
Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution .............................................. 6 - 39
One-shot execution................................................................................................................. 6 - 40
Job Settings - Actions .................................................................................................................... 6 - 42
6.8.1
6.8.2
6.8.3
6.9
Setting items in Server service settings.................................................................................. 6 - 18
Job Settings ................................................................................................................................... 6 - 21
6.7.1
6.7.2
6.7.3
6.7.4
6.7.5
6.7.6
6.8
Setting items in Device tag settings.......................................................................................... 6 - 7
Setting items in Array setting .................................................................................................... 6 - 9
Setting items in Component setting ........................................................................................ 6 - 11
Setting items in Communication action................................................................................... 6 - 46
Setting items in Operation action............................................................................................ 6 - 68
Setting items in Transmit resource action............................................................................... 6 - 72
Option Setting ................................................................................................................................ 6 - 85
6.9.1
6.9.2
Setting items in SNTP time synchronization setting ............................................................... 6 - 86
Setting items in DB buffering settings..................................................................................... 6 - 88
6.10 Diagnosis ....................................................................................................................................... 6 - 92
6.10.1
A-6
Checking the MES Interface Function status (Status) ............................................................ 6 - 93
6.10.2
6.10.3
6.10.4
6.10.5
6.10.6
Manipulating the MES Interface Function status (Operation)................................................. 6 - 94
Changing the job status (Change job status) ......................................................................... 6 - 95
Checking the connection of the previous job execution (Connection result of previous job
execution) ............................................................................................................................... 6 - 97
Manipulating DB buffering (DB buffering operation)............................................................... 6 - 98
Checking the trigger buffering (Trigger buffering status) ........................................................ 6 - 99
6.11 Working Log................................................................................................................................. 6 - 100
6.11.1
6.11.2
MES Interface Execute Log.................................................................................................. 6 - 101
Job Execute Log................................................................................................................... 6 - 102
6.12 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 6 - 107
CHAPTER 7
DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL
7 - 1 to 7 - 25
7.1
DB Connection Service Functions ................................................................................................... 7 - 1
7.2
Setting ODBC of Database.............................................................................................................. 7 - 4
7.3
Starting DB Connection Service Setting Tool ................................................................................ 7 - 12
7.4
Screen Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool ............................................................. 7 - 13
7.4.1
7.4.2
Screen structure ..................................................................................................................... 7 - 13
Menu configuration ................................................................................................................. 7 - 14
7.5
Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool .................................................................. 7 - 15
7.6
Importing/Exporting Files .............................................................................................................. 7 - 20
7.7
Help ............................................................................................................................................... 7 - 21
7.8
Output Log Specifications.............................................................................................................. 7 - 22
7.8.1
7.8.2
Access log .............................................................................................................................. 7 - 23
SQL failure log ...................................................................................................................... 7 - 25
CHAPTER 8
8.1
8 - 1 to 8 - 18
Error Handling and Recovery Method ............................................................................................. 8 - 1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.2
TROUBLESHOOTING
MES Interface Function setting ................................................................................................ 8 - 3
When using DB Connection Service Setting Tool .................................................................... 8 - 5
Error Code List................................................................................................................................. 8 - 6
8.2.1
8.2.2
Error log in the Working log ...................................................................................................... 8 - 6
DB Connection Service .......................................................................................................... 8 - 10
APPENDICES
App - 1 to App - 18
Appendix 1 Usable Characters and ASCII Code Tables by Setting Items .............................................App - 1
Appendix 1.1 ASCII code table .........................................................................................................App - 1
Appendix 1.2 Characters applicable to item names, component names, variable names, etc. ........App - 2
Appendix 1.3 Characters applicable to character string constants, etc.............................................App - 3
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc. .............................................App - 3
Appendix 2 About Monitoring Interval Timeout.......................................................................................App - 4
Appendix 3 Warning Messages in Windows Vista(R) ............................................................................App - 7
Appendix 3.1 Overview of warning messages ..................................................................................App - 7
Appendix 3.2 Methods for disabling warning messages ...................................................................App - 7
Appendix 4 Tables for Used Terms ...................................................................................................... App - 13
Appendix 5 Application Example of MES Interface Function ............................................................... App - 14
A-7
Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by MES Interface Function Version Upgrade..............................App - 17
INDEX
A-8
Index - 1 to Index - 2
ABOUT MANUALS
The following related mauals are available.
Please obtain the manuals if necessary.
Manual number
Manual name
(Model code)
GT16 User's Manual
-Describes the GT16 hardware-relevant contents, including the specifications, part names, mounting, power
supply wiring, external dimensions, and option devices.
SH-080978ENG
(1D7M88)
-Describes the GT16 functions, including the utility.
(Sold separately)
GT15 User's Manual
-Describes the GT15 hardware-relevant contents, including the specifications, part names, mounting, power
supply wiring, external dimensions, and option devices.
SH-080528ENG
(1D7M23)
-Describes the GT15 functions, including the utility.
(Sold separately)
GT Designer2 Version2 Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (For GOT1000 Series)
Describes the GT Designer2 installation procedure, basic operations for drawing, and how to transfer data to the
GOT1000 series.
SH-080529ENG
(1D7M24)
(Sold separately)*1
GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) 1/3
GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) 2/3
SH-080530ENG
GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) 3/3
Describe the specifications and setting details of each object function used in the GOT1000 series.
(1D7M25)
(Sold separately)*1
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 1/3
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 2/3
SH-080532ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 3/3
Describe the system configurations available for the GOT1000 series and how to produce cables.
(1D7M26)
(Sold separately)*1
GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual
SH-080545ENG
Describes the gateway function specifications, system configurations, and setting method.
(Sold separately)*1
*1
(1D7M33)
The manual data in PDF format are included in the product of GT Works2 or GT Designer2.
A -9
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS
Abbreviations and generic terms used in this manual are as follows:
GOT
Abbreviations and generic terms
Description
GT SoftGOT1000
Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000
GT1695
GT1695M-X
Abbreviation of GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M-XTBD
GT1685
GT1685M-S
Abbreviation of GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M-STBD
GT16
GT1595
GT1585
GT157
GT156
GOT1000 Series
GT155
GT15
GT115
, GT16
Abbreviation of GT1695, GT1685
GT1595-X
Abbreviation of GT1595-XTBA, GT1595-XTBD
GT1585V-S
Abbreviation of GT1585V-STBA, GT1585V-STBD
GT1585-S
Abbreviation of GT1585-STBA, GT1585-STBD
GT1575V-S
Abbreviation of GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD
GT1575-S
Abbreviation of GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD
GT1575-V
Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD
GT1575-VN
Abbreviation of GT1575-VNBA, GT1575-VNBD
GT1572-VN
Abbreviation of GT1572-VNBA, GT1572-VNBD
GT1565-V
Abbreviation of GT1565-VTBA, GT1565-VTBD
GT1562-VN
Abbreviation of GT1562-VNBA, GT1562-VNBD
GT1555-V
Abbreviation of GT1555-VTBD
GT1555-Q
Abbreviation of GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD
GT1550-Q
Abbreviation of GT1550-QLBD
, GT15
GT1155-Q
Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155
Abbreviation of GT1155-QTBDQ, GT1155-QSBDQ, GT1155-QTBDA, GT1155-QSBDA,
GT1155-QTBD, GT1155-QSBD
GT1150-Q
Abbreviation of GT1150-QLBDQ, GT1150-QLBDA, GT1150-QLBD
Handy
GT1155HS-Q
Abbreviation of GT1155HS-QSBD
GOT
GT1150HS-Q
Abbreviation of GT1150HS-QLBD
GT11
GT105
, GT11
GT1055-Q
Abbreviation of GT1055-QSBD
GT1050-Q
Abbreviation of GT1050-QBBD
GT1030
Abbreviation of GT1030-LBD, GT1030-LBD2, GT1030-LBDW, GT1030-LBDW2
Abbreviation of GT1020-LBD, GT1020-LBD2, GT1020-LBL, GT1020-LBDW,
GT1020
GT10
Abbreviation of GT115 , GT11 Handy GOT
GT1020-LBDW2, GT1020-LBLW
, GT10
Abbreviation of GT105 , GT1030, GT1020
GOT900 Series
Abbreviation of GOT-A900 series, GOT-F900 series
GOT800 Series
Abbreviation of GOT-800 series
A - 10
Communication unit
Abbreviations and generic terms
Description
GT15-QBUS,
GT15-QBUS2,
GT15-ABUS,
GT15-ABUS2,
GT15-75QBUSL,
GT15-75QBUS2L,
GT15-75ABUSL,
GT15-75ABUS2L
Serial communication unit
GT15-RS2-9P,
GT15-RS4-9S,
GT15-RS4-TE
RS-422 conversion unit
GT15-RS2T4-9P,
GT15-RS2T4-25P
Ethernet communication unit
GT15-J71E71-100
MELSECNET/H communication unit
GT15-J71LP23-25,
MELSECNET/10 communication unit
GT15-75J71LP23-Z*1, GT15-75J71BR13-Z*2
Bus connection unit
CC-Link IE controller network communication
unit
GT15-J71GP23-SX
CC-Link communication unit
GT15-J61BT13,
Interface converter unit
GT15-75IF900
*1
GT15-J71BR13
GT15-75J61BT13-Z*3
A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set
*2
A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set
*3
A8GT-J61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set
Option unit
Abbreviations and generic terms
Printer unit
Video/RGB unit
Video input unit
GT16M-V4,
GT15V-75V4
RGB input unit
GT16M-R2,
GT15V-75R1
Video/RGB input unit
GT16M-V4R1,
GT15V-75V4R1
RGB output unit
GT16M-ROUT,
GT15V-75ROUT
Multimedia unit
GT16M-MMR
CF card unit
CF card extension
Description
GT15-PRN
GT15-CFCD
unit*1
GT15-CFEX-C08SET
External I/O unit
GT15-DIO,
Sound output unit
GT15-SOUT
*1
GT15-DIOR
GT15-CFEX + GT15-CFEXIF + GT15-C08CF set.
A - 11
Option
Abbreviations and generic terms
Memory card
CF card
Memory card adaptor
Option function board
Battery
Protective Sheet
Description
GT05-MEM-16MC,
GT05-MEM-32MC,
GT05-MEM-64MC,
GT05-MEM-128MC,
GT05-MEM-256MC
GT05-MEM-ADPC
GT16-MESB,
GT15-FNB,
GT15-QFNB,
GT15-QFNB16M,
GT15-QFNB32M,
GT15-QFNB48M,
GT15-MESB48M,
GT11-50FNB
GT15-BAT,
GT11-50BAT
GT16-90PSCB,
GT16-90PSGB,
GT16-90PSCW,
GT16-90PSGW,
GT16-80PSCB,
GT16-80PSGB,
GT16-80PSCW,
GT16-80PSGW,
GT15-90PSCB,
GT15-90PSGB,
GT15-90PSCW,
GT15-90PSGW,
GT15-80PSCB,
GT15-80PSGB,
GT15-80PSCW,
GT15-80PSGW,
GT15-70PSCB,
GT15-70PSGB,
GT15-70PSCW,
GT15-70PSGW,
GT15-60PSCB,
GT15-60PSGB,
GT15-60PSCW,
GT15-60PSGW,
GT15-50PSCB,
GT15-50PSGB,
GT15-50PSCW,
GT15-50PSGW,
GT11-50PSCB,
GT11-50PSGB,
GT11-50PSCW,
GT11-50PSGW,
GT10-50PSCB,
GT10-50PSGB,
GT10-50PSCW,
GT10-50PSGW,
GT10-30PSCB,
GT10-30PSGB,
GT10-30PSCW,
GT10-30PSGW,
GT10-20PSCB,
GT10-20PSGB,
GT10-20PSCW,
GT10-20PSGW
GT05-90PCO,
GT05-80PCO,
GT05-70PCO,
GT05-60PCO,
GT16-UCOV,
GT15-UCOV,
GT11-50UCOV
GT15-90STAND,
GT15-80STAND,
GT15-70STAND,
A9GT-50STAND,
GT15-70ATT-98,
GT15-70ATT-87,
GT15-60ATT-97,
GT15-60ATT-96,
GT15-60ATT-87,
GT15-60ATT-77,
GT15-50ATT-95W,
GT15-50ATT-85
GT11H-50PSC,
Protective cover for oil
USB environmental protection cover
Stand
GT05-50PCO
GT05-50STAND
Attachment
Backlight
GT16-90XLTT,
GT16-80SLTT,
GT15-90XLTT,
GT15-80SLTT,
GT15-70SLTT,
GT15-70VLTT,
GT15-70VLTN,
GT15-60VLTT,
GT15-60VLTN
Multi-color display board
GT15-XHNB,
Connector conversion box
GT11H-CNB-37S
Emergency stop sw guard cover
GT11H-50ESCOV
Memory loader
GT10-LDR
Memory board
GT10-50FMB
GT15-VHNB
Software
Abbreviations and generic terms
Description
GT Works2 Version
SW D5C-GTWK2-E, SW D5C-GTWK2-EV
GT Designer2 Version
SW D5C-GTD2-E, SW D5C-GTD2-EV
GT Designer2
Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT Converter2
Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT Simulator2
Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator 2 for GOT1000 / GOT900 series
GT SoftGOT1000
Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000
GT SoftGOT2
Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT2
GX Developer
Abbreviation of SW D5C-GPPW-E(-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW-E type software package
GX Simulator
Abbreviation of SW D5C-LLT-E(-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software packages
(SW5D5C-LLT (-EV) or later versions)
Document Converter
Abbreviation of document data conversion software Document Converter for GOT1000 series
PX Developer
Abbreviation of SW D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control
A - 12
License key (for GT SoftGOT1000)
Abbreviations and generic terms
License
Description
GT15-SGTKEY-U, GT15-SGTKEY-P
License key (for GT SoftGOT2)
Abbreviations and generic terms
Description
License key
A9GTSOFT-LKEY-P (For DOS/V PC)
License key FD
SW5D5F-SGLKEY-J (For PC CPU module)
Others
Abbreviations and generic terms
Description
OMRON PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by OMRON Corporation
KEYENCE PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION
KOYO EI PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
SHARP PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Sharp Corporation
JTEKT PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by JTEKT Corporation
TOSHIBA PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by TOSHIBA CORPORATION
TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD.
HITACHI IES PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
HITACHI PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.
FUJI FA PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd.
MATSUSHITA PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.
YASKAWA PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation
YOKOGAWA PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Yokogawa Electric Corporation
ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC
Abbreviation of Allen-Bradley PLC manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.
GE FANUC PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by GE Fanuc Automation Corporation
LS IS PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.
SCHNEIDER PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Schneider Electric SA
SIEMENS PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Siemens AG
OMRON temperature
controller
SHINKO indicating
controller
CHINO controller
FUJI SYS temperature
Temperature
controller
controller
YAMATAKE temperature
controller
YOKOGAWA temperature
controller
RKC temperature
controller
Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by OMRON Corporation
Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.
Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION
Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Fuji Electric Systems Co., Ltd.
Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Yamatake Corporation
Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Yokogawa Electric Corporation
Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by RKC INSTRUMENT INC.
PC CPU module
Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD
GOT (server)
Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function
GOT (client)
Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function
Windows
font
Intelligent function module
MODBUS
/TCP
Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows
(Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer2)
Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU, power supply module and I/O module that are
mounted to the base unit.
Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS
protocol messages on a TCP/IP
network.
A - 13
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL
The following symbols are used in this manual.
Display reference ahead
Referring ahead and the
reference manual have
been described by the
finger mark.
Display of chapter finding
The chapter on the page which is the
opening in the index at the right of the
page is understood at one view.
Display of section and subsection title
The section and the sebsection on the
open page are understood at one view.
The figure above is for explanation purposes only, and therefore differs from the actual
pages.
There are also the following types of explanations.
Point
Provides cautions or useful functions in addition to the page descriptions.
Remark
Gives references related to the contents explained on the page, or useful information.
A - 14
DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS
The following table shows the definitions and descriptions of the terms used in this
manual.
Term
Tag for Wonderware
Historian
Description
Name for data unit in the data base Wonderware
Historian.
Abbreviation for Manufacturing Execution System
The system that controls and monitors the plant status in real time to optimize production
MES
activities
This enables speed-up of the responses to production plans and status changes and efficient
production operation, optimizing the production activities.
ODBC
SNTP
SNTP server computer
SQL
UTF-8
XML
Account
Abbreviation for Open Database Connectivity
Standard specifications for software to access databases
Abbreviation for Simple Network Time Protocol
Protocol for synchronizing the time of computers via a TCP/IP network
Computer that provides time information to the GOT
This can be shared with a server computer.
Abbreviation for Structured Query Language
Data manipulation language and used for relational database operations
Method for converting character strings defined in Unicode into byte strings (Number strings)
Abbreviation for eXtensible Markup Language
Markup language for describing documentation, data meanings, and structures
Represents the right to use a GOT or a server computer, or an ID necessary for its use.
The unit for processing defined in the job. The unit for processing includes [Communication
action] and [Transmit resource action] for communicating with a database, and [Operation
action] for operating tag component values.
Action
[Communication action] is a processing unit for sending one SQL text (Select, Update, Insert,
MultiSelect).
[Transmit resource action] is the processing unit for sending each SQL text (Insert) for records
in one resource data collected in the GOT.
Up to 20 dyadic operations can be defined for [Operation action].
One of the server computers, which communicates by the MES interface function to run
Application server computer programs
A database computer can be shared as an application server computer.
COMMIT
Processing that makes a permanent change to databases
Generic term for the services that a server computer to which the DB Connection Service is
installed can offer.
Server service
There are database server service and application server service.
Database server service is a service for accessing a database.
Server computer
Job
Application server service is a service for linking with a program.
Generic term for database server computers and application server computers
This computer can be shared as an SNTP server computer.
A set of processings executed by a preset trigger
A personal computer that runs GT Designer2
Configuration computer
This is used to install the option OS into a GOT, to configure the Communication Settings,
screens and MES interface function settings, and to download projects to the GOT.
This can be shared as a server computer.
(To the next page)
A - 15
(From the previous page)
Term
Description
Standard time zone for each region of the world
Each nation uses the time difference (within
12 hours) from the time at the Greenwich
Observatory in the United Kingdom (GMT) as the standard time. The region using the same
Time zone
time difference is called a time zone.
The standard time for Japan is 9 hours ahead of the GMT.
Some nations adopt daylight-saving time in summer season in which clocks are set one hour
ahead of the standard time.
Tag component
(Component)
Generic term for components (Device data) making up a device tag (Tag)
A set of data that contains the information on the GOT's internal devices, and the data type
and devices required for access to the gateway devices
Connection information necessary for accessing data using ODBC
Data source
With Windows , a data source name is assigned to connection information for manegement.
The database can be accessed via ODBC by specifying the data source name in the MES
Database (DB)
interface function.
Data management method that follows relational data model logic
or
One data is expressed as a collection of multiple items (Fields) and the data collection is
Relational
expressed as a table.
database (RDB)
Data can be easily merged and selected using key data.
Database computer
Table
Device
Device tag (Tag)
One of the server computers, on which the database communicating with the GOT is run
when the MES interface function is used.
Data management format managed with relational databases
It is a two-dimensional table format composed of rows and columns.
Variety of memory data that each controller internally contains.
There are devices handled in units of bits and those handled in units of words.
Data table that contains a set of information (Components) required to access the device data
in the GOT
Unit that multiple databases related to each other can be correctly processed all at once.
Transaction
Trigger conditions
Processing managed as transaction is either correctly completed or canceled with the
rollback. Each database is processed by the action, and each transaction is processed by the
job with the MES interface function.
Startup conditions for job operation
When too many trigger conditions (data transmission conditions) are met simultaneously, this
function allows the system to buffer the data and the time that trigger conditions are met to the
Trigger buffering
user area. The action (operation and transmission of the data) for the buffered data is
executed later.
Even when the data transmission triggers are activated frequently, no triggers are missed so
DB buffering
Handshake
Field
that all the jobs are executed.
This function allows the system to temporarily store SQL texts that failed to be sent due to a
communication error in a CF card and to resend the texts upon recovery.
A constant exchange of signals between the sending and receiving ends to achieve high
reliability
Corresponds to a column in a relational database and indicates a type of data (Record
attribute).
Variable (Temporary
Variable that can be used in the same job when temporarily storing values selected from a
variable)
database or when writing operation values to a database or tag components.
Corresponds to a row in a relational database. One row (Record) stores the values of multiple
Record
Rollback
A - 16
columns (Fields).
Processing for canceling changes to a database
1
Point
The MES interface function is available only for GT16 and GT15.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
The MES interface function allows SQL text transmission from a GOT to a database in the
server computer connected via the Ethernet, enabling writing GOT's device values to the
database and reading database values to set them to GOT's devices.
This direct communication with the server computer eliminates the need for gateway
equipment, realizing reduction in the maintenance cost and improvement in reliability.
OVERVIEW
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
3
When using MES interface function
Server (Database)
SPECIFICATIONS
When not using MES interface function
Server (Database)
Communication gateway
No gateway required
SQL
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
5
Controller
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Controller
GOT
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
GOT
1-1
1.1 Features
This section explains the features of the MES interface function.
(1) Simple setting enables connection to the information system without
programming.
Access to information system databases can be realized simply by making the
necessary settings with the setting tool.
Since there is no need to create programs for generating SQL texts, the engineering
costs for system construction and the work period can be reduced.
1-2
1.1 Features
1
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(a) Buffering of send data (SQL text) during a communication error
When an error occurs during communications with a database, the SQL texts
failed to be sent can be buffered in the GOT.
After recovery, the buffered SQL texts are automatically sent to the database.
(Manual operation is also possible.)
OVERVIEW
(2) Important data can be protected.
Disconnected
Database
3
SPECIFICATIONS
INSERT
INSERT
INSERT
UPDATE
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
CF card
Recovered
Resend
Database
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
INSERT
INSERT
INSERT
UPDATE
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
CF card
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
1.1 Features
1-3
(b) Obtaining logs in the event of access errors
After connection to a database, if a communication error occurs, the error details
can be recorded as a log on the database side.
Analyzing the log is useful for data protection and error analysis.
Database
DB connection service
Access
log
SQL failure
log
(3) The information system load can be reduced.
Data can be monitored on the GOT and when the conditions are met, the data can be
sent to the information system.
This can reduce the information system load, compared to the case of the
conventional system that constantly samples and monitors data.
[With the MES interface function]
<Information system>
Data transmission only when needed
Conditions met
Database
[Conventional system]
<Information system>
Database
Constant sampling/monitoring from
information system is required.
1-4
1.1 Features
Freely designed database tables can be used for access to databases.
The MES interface function offers not only the high flexibility in designing a new
system but also the capability of reconstructing the existing system without changing
the database tables.
(5) Various controller information can be stored and changed in the database.
3
SPECIFICATIONS
Controllers can be connected in a variety of topologies and their information can be
stored into a database via GOT devices.
Also, data read out from the database can be set to controllers as parameters via
GOT devices.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(4) Access independent of the database table configuration is possible.
OVERVIEW
1
PLC
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
Inverter
5
<MES interface function>
Data transmission
Status monitoring function
Script function
Gateway function
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Servo
Database
Data query
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
Microcomputer
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Barcode reader
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
1.1 Features
1-5
(6) Other features
(a) Reducing setting mistakes by use of tag names
Tag names can be assigned to devices.
Assigning recognizable tag names can reduce setting mistakes.
(b) Obtaining the exact time by time synchronization
By periodically obtaining the time from the SNTP server and updating the time of
the GOT, the correct time can be ensured.
(c) Supporting system construction
The diagnostic function allows checking the operating status of the MES interface
function (in real time, log).
Modification of the job status and test operation of a project under design is also
possible.
1-6
1.1 Features
1
OVERVIEW
1.2 What is the MES Interface Function?
Item
Installed from the CD-ROM of GTWorks2/GT Designer2.
Chapter 7
Software that runs on the server computer and changes the settings of the DB
Connection Service.
3
Chapter 7
Installed from the CD-ROM of GTWorks2/GT Designer2.
SPECIFICATIONS
Setting Tool
Software that runs on the server computer and links databases with the GOT.
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
DB Connection Service
Chapter 6
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
DB Connection Service
This function allows the MES interface function setting in GT Designer2.
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
setting
Chapter 5
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
MES interface function
section
The option OS that runs on a GOT to realize the MES interface function.
2
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Option OS (MES Interface)
Description
Reference
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
The items listed below are used with the MES interface function.
For equipment required for the MES interface function, refer to the following:
Section 2.3 Required Equipment, Software and Option OS
1.2 What is the MES Interface Function?
1-7
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
This chapter explains the system configuration available for the MES interface function.
2.1 System Configuration
2.1.1 Overall system configuration
This section shows the overall system configuration when using the MES interface
function.
Database
SNTP server computer*1
Oracle , SQL Server
(Third party product)
Server computer
DB Connection Service
DB Connection Service Setting Tool
Ethernet
Install
Configuration computer*1
USB*3
GOT
GT Designer2
* MES interface function
* Option OS
Download
MELSECNET/H, etc.*2
*1
*2
The SNTP server computer and configuration computer can be shared as the server computer.
For controllers available for the MES interface function, refer to the following manual.
*3
RS-232 or Ethernet connection is also available.
However, in Ethernet connection, the option OS cannot be installed.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
2-1
2.1 System Configuration
2.1.1 Overall system configuration
1
The following shows system configuration when installing software used for the MES
interface function.
Sever computer
GT Works2
GT Designer2
Install
3
SPECIFICATIONS
DB Connection Service
DB Connection Service Setting Tool
Commercial product
(1) When installing DB Connection Service on a database server computer, the
ODBC setting for the database used must be made beforehand.
Section 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
(2) When installing DB Connection Service on an application server computer, an
account for user program execution must be created beforehand.
Configuration computer
GT Works2
GT Designer2
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
(2) When installing GT Designer2 on a configuration computer
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
Point
Install
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
GT Designer2
Commercial product
(3) When installing Option OS (MES Interface) on the GOT
7
Computer
GOT
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Option OS
(MES interface)
Install*1
GT Designer2
+
MES interface function
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
Commercial product
*1
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(1) When installing the DB Connection Service and DB Connection Service
Setting Tool on a server computer
OVERVIEW
2.1.2 System configuration when installing software used for the MES
Interface Function
For equipment used for installation, refer to the following manual:
GT Designer2 Version
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual
2.1 System Configuration
2.1.2 System configuration when installing software used for the MES Interface Function
2-2
2.2 Connection between GOT and Controllers
2.2.1 Connection type used for the MES Interface Function
The following table shows the GOT supporting the MES interface function and availability
in each connection type.
For system configuration when using the MES interface function, refer to the following
manual:
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
: Applicable
: Partly restricted
Connection type
: Not applicable
GT16/GT15
Bus connection
Direct CPU connection
Computer link connection
MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
Mitsubishi
PLC*4
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC
network)
connection
*1
CC-Link IE controller network connection
CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station)
*2
CC-Link connection (via G4)
Ethernet connection*7
Serial connection
Third party PLC
connection
Ethernet connection*7
MODBUS
/TCP connection
Microcomputer connection
Temperature controller connection
Inverter connection
*3
Servo amplifier connection
*3
Robot controller connection*5
Direct CPU connection
MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
CNC connection*6
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC
network)
CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station)
*1
*2
Ethernet connection*7
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
2-3
For the MELSECNET/10 connection, use the MELSECNET/H communication unit.
The MELSECNET/10 communication unit cannot be used.
For the CC-Link connection, use the CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13).
The CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BR13-Z) cannot be used.
For the inverter or servo amplifier connection, use the status observation function or the script
function to assign devices.
For how to assign devices, refer to the following:
Section 2.2.2 Precautions for inverter or servo amplifier connection
Including connection to the motion controller CPU (Q series and A series), CNC C70, and CRnQ700
Applicable to the CRnD-700 only. For the CRnQ-700, refer to the above Mitsubishi PLC
connection.
Applicable to the MELDAS C6/C64 only. For the CNC C70, refer to the above Mitsubishi PLC
connection.
For connecting GT16 to a device supporting 10BASE(-T/2/5), configure the network that supports
both 10Mbps and 100Mbps communication speeds by using a switching hub.
2.2 Connection between GOT and Controllers
2.2.1 Connection type used for the MES Interface Function
1
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Connection type examples for the case where the MES interface function cannot
be used
(Example 1) When using GT11
Because the Ethernet communication unit is not mountable, the MES interface
function cannot be used.
OVERVIEW
Remark
(Example 2) When using GT15
Since the CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BR13-Z) is not mountable
concurrently together with the Ethernet communication unit, the MES interface
function cannot be used.
To utilize both of them concurrently, use another type of the CC-Link
communication unit (GT15-J61BT13).
SPECIFICATIONS
3
Ethernet communication
unit
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
GT11
5
CC-Link communication unit
(GT15-75J61BR13-Z)
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
GT15
Ethernet communication
unit
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
2.2 Connection between GOT and Controllers
2.2.1 Connection type used for the MES Interface Function
2-4
2.2.2 Precautions for inverter or servo amplifier connection
In the inverter or servo amplifier connection, the status observation function or the script
function must be used for device assignment.
For the status observation function and the script function, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual
The following are device assignment examples.
Example 1) Setting for assigning devices of the inverter [FREQROL 500/700 Series] to
the GOT's internal devices using the status observation function
Example 2) Setting for assigning devices of the inverter [FREQROL 500/700 Series] to
the GOT's internal devices using the status observation function
Setting item
Trigger
Setting content
Remarks
ON Device GB40
Ordinary (GB40 is always ON.)
[w:GD0]=[0-0:w:A0];
that has channel No. 1 and station No. 0 to
Assigns devices A0 to A15 of the inverter
device GD0.
Assigns devices Pr 0 to Pr 15 of the inverter
[w:GD10]=[0-0:w:Pr0];
that has channel No. 1 and station No. 0 to
device GD 10.
Operation device
Assigns devices PG0 to PG15 of the inverter
[w:GD20]=[0-0:w:PG0];
that has channel No.1 and station No.0 to
device GD20.
Assigns devices A0 to A15 of the inverter that
[w:GD31600]=[@3:0-16:w:A0];
has channel No.3 and station No.16 to device
GD31600.
2-5
2.2 Connection between GOT and Controllers
2.2.2 Precautions for inverter or servo amplifier connection
1
(1) Required equipment and software
The following table lists the equipment and software required for use of the MES
interface function.
(a) GT16
Module name
GT16-MESB
Connecting the GOT to Ethernet
Built-in Ethernet interface
-
Setting the MES interface
function
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
Setting the MES interface
GT Designer2 Version2.90U or later
function
(MES interface function)
GT15-MEM-128MC
DB buffering function,
log output function,
CF card
diagnostics function
*1
3
-
GT15-MEM-256MC
Commercially available CF card
(128MB to 2GB)*1
Some models have been concluded by Mitsubishi to be applicable.
For the applicable models, refer to "List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 Series" (GOT-D001).
The above TECHNICAL BULLETIN can be viewed at the Information site for Mitsubishi Electric
Industrial Automation products, MELFANSweb.
(MELFANSweb site: http://www.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp/melfansweb)
For installation of the required equipment, refer to the following manual.
GT16 User's Manual
For connection of the required equipment, refer to the following manual.
SPECIFICATIONS
Connecting the GOT to controllers
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Required equipment/software
Option function board
2
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Application
Executing the MES interface function on the GOT
OVERVIEW
2.3 Required Equipment, Software and Option OS
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
(b) GT15
Module name
GT15-MESB48M
Connecting the GOT to Ethernet
Ethernet communication unit
GT15-J71E71-100
Connecting the GOT to controllers
function
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
Setting the MES interface
GT Designer2 Version2.43V or later
function
(MES interface function)
GT15-MEM-128MC
DB buffering function,
log output function,
CF card
diagnostics function
*1
-
GT15-MEM-256MC
Commercially available CF card
(128MB to 2GB)*1
Some models have been concluded by Mitsubishi to be applicable.
For the applicable models, refer to "List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 Series" (GOT-D001).
The above TECHNICAL BULLETIN can be viewed at the Information site for Mitsubishi Electric
Industrial Automation products, MELFANSweb.
(MELFANSweb site: http://www.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp/melfansweb)
For installation of the required equipment, refer to the following manual.
GT15 User's Manual
For connection of the required equipment, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
2.3 Required Equipment, Software and Option OS
7
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Setting the MES interface
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Required equipment/software
Option function board
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Application
Executing the MES interface function on the GOT
2-6
(2) Required option OS
The following shows the option OS required for use of the MES interface function.
Application
MES interface function
OS name
MES Interface
For installation of the required option OS, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version
TRANSFERRING DATA)
2-7
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (8.
2.3 Required Equipment, Software and Option OS
1
OVERVIEW
2.4 Operating Environment
The following is the operating environment for the configuration computer.
Items other than the shown item for the MES interface function are identical to those for
GT Designer2.
For the operating environment for GT Designer2, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual
Item
Description
Resolution 1024 x 768 pixels or higher
SPECIFICATIONS
3
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Display
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2.4.1 Configuration computer
2.4 Operating Environment
2.4.1 Configuration computer
2-8
2.4.2 Server computer (SNTP server computer)
This section explains the operating environment for the server computer.
Item
Personal computer
Description
A PC/AT-compatible computer on which the following operating systems can run
OS
Microsoft
Windows XP Professional Operating System (English version)*1*3*4
Microsoft
Windows 2000 Professional Operating System (English version)*2*3
Microsoft
Windows Server 2003 Operating System (English version)*1*3*4
Microsoft
Windows 2000 Server Operating System (English version)*2*3
Microsoft
Windows Vista
Ultimate Operating System (English version)*1*3*4*10*11
Microsoft
Windows Vista
Enterprise Operating System (English version)*1*3*4*10*11
Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System (English version)*1*3*4*10*11
A PC/AT-compatible computer on which the following operating systems can run
Computer
CPU
Required
See "Performance required for personal computer and operating system to be used" below.
memory
Free hard disk space
64MB or more (After database installation)
Disk drive
CD-ROM disk drive
Display
A display where the above OS and after-mentioned databases can run
Interface
Ethernet
When using the DB interface function: Relational database (any of the following)
Required software
• Oracle
8i Standard Edition
• Oracle
9i Standard Edition
• Oracle
10g Standard Edition
• Microsoft
SQL Server 2000 Standard Edition*5
• Microsoft
SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition
• Microsoft
SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine(MSDE 2000)*5
• Microsoft
Access 2000*6*7
• Microsoft
Access 2003*6*7
• Microsoft
Access 2007*5*6*12*13
• Wonderware Historian 9.0*8*9
When using the SNTP time synchronization function: SNTP server
(Equipped as a standard to Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003)
The mouse, keyboard, and CD-ROM driver must be compatible with the above OS.
Others
*1
Only the 32-bit OS is available.
*2
When using Windows 2000 Server or Windows 2000 Professional, ServicePack2 or later is
required.
To install or operate DB Connection Service or DB Connection Service Setting Tool, the
administrator authority is required.
The following functions are not available.
If any of the following functions is used, this product many not operate normally.
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
• Application startup in Windows compatibility mode
• User simple switching
• Remote desktop
• Large Fonts (Detailed setting in the Display Properties)
Set [SQL Server and Windows] for the security authentication mode.
Up to 127 fields can be updated for a communication action.
Do not access the same file with multiple GOTs and MES interface modules simultaneously.
Only [Insert] can be used for the communication action.
The rollback cannot be used for inserting data to a database.
*10 15GB or more of free space is required for using Windows Vista .
*11 A standard user or Administrator account is required for using Windows Vista .
*12 Memo-type fields in Rich Text Format cannot be used.
*13 A field having multiple values cannot be used.
2-9
2.4 Operating Environment
2.4.2 Server computer (SNTP server computer)
1
Performance required for personal computer and operating system to be used
Performance required for personal computer
Windows XP Professional
CPU
Required memory
OVERVIEW
Operating system
Intel Pentium /Celeron series
CPU with clock speed of at least 300
Windows 2000 Professional
128 MB or more
MHz
2
Intel Pentium /Celeron series
CPU with clock speed of at least 550
Windows 2000 Server
256 MB or more
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Windows Server 2003
MHz
Windows Vista Ultimate
Intel Pentium /Celeron series
Windows Vista Enterprise
CPU with clock speed of at least
Windows Vista Business
1GHz
1GB or more
3
Point
SPECIFICATIONS
How to set security authentication mode (SQL Server and Windows)
(1) For Microsoft SQL Server 2000 and Microsoft SQL Server 2005
Set the security authentication mode in the SQL Server Properties
(Configure) screen.
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
(2) For Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine (MSDE 2000)
When installing MSDE2000, specify a command parameter.
setup sapwd = "sa" SECURITYMODE=SQL
(sa: Specify an arbitrary password.)
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
2.4 Operating Environment
2.4.2 Server computer (SNTP server computer)
2 - 10
2.5 Cautions on System Configuration
(1) Relational databases that support the MES interface function
For the relational databases that support the MES interface function, refer to the
following:
Section 2.4.2 Server computer (SNTP server computer)
(2) Notes when CF card is used
Insert the memory card into the A drive of the GOT.
The CF card cannot be used in B drive.
2 - 11
2.5 Cautions on System Configuration
1
This chapter explains the performance specifications, functions and devices of the MES
interface function.
The following are the performance specifications of the MES interface function.
Item
Specifications
Reference
section
Up to 8 databases/project
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
3.1 Performance Specifications
No. of connected databases
OVERVIEW
CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS
3
10g Standard Edition
• Microsoft
SQL Server 2000 Standard Edition
• Microsoft
SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition
• Microsoft
SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine(MSDE 2000)
• Microsoft
Access 2000
• Microsoft
Access 2003
• Microsoft
Access 2007
• Wonderware
Allowable number of
Job
settings
conditions
Up to 64 jobs/project
Section 6.7.1
Up to 128 tag components/tag
No. of conditions can
Up to 2 conditions
• (Combination can be selected either AND or OR)/job
20 types (Time specification (6 types), Specified time period,
trigger
Condition type
interface
comparison between tag component values (6 types), comparison
Section 6.7.2
between tag component value and constant value (6 types), At
module startup) and Handshake operation
Validation interval
Allowable number of
settings
Communication action
type
Up to 10 actions/job
Section 6.8
4 types (Select, Update, Insert, MultiSelect)
Up to 8192 fields/project
• [DB-Tag link setting]: Up to 256 rows/communication action
action fields
• [Select/Update conditions]: Up to 8 rows/communication action
• [Select sort settings]: Maximum 8 rows/communication action
Action
No. of records/data
selectable for
communication action
Section 6.8.1
Up to 40000 records/MultiSelect communication action
Up to 45000 words/job
No. of operations
possible for operation
(Up to 20 dyadic operations)/operation action
action
Section 6.8.2
Operators for operation
6 types (Addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, remainder,
action
character string combination)
No. of resource data
send action fields
Maximum 8192 fields/project
Section 6.8.3
(To the next page)
3.1 Performance Specifications
5
6
One second at the minimum
No. of communication
4
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
DB
Historian 9.0
Trigger buffering
be combined
Section 6.6.1
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
9i Standard Edition
• Oracle
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
• Oracle
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
8i Standard Edition
3-1
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
No. of connectable databases
• Oracle
SPECIFICATIONS
Seven types
(From the previous page)
Item
Reference
Specifications
No. of tags
section
Up to 64 tags/project
No. of tag components
Up to 256 tag components/tag
Up to 4096 tag components/project
5 types (Signed single-precision integer type (16 bits), signed
Device tag
Data type
double-precision integer type (32 bits), single-precision floating point
Character string length
Up to 32 characters
type (32 bits), bit type, character string type)
DB
No. of statistical
interface
processings
Section 6.5.3
Up to 64 tag components
6 types
Device tag
Statistical processing
(Average, maximum, minimum, moving average*1, moving
Program
Allowable number of
(Once before execution of the initial action + once after execution of
execution
settings
the final action)/job
DB
Buffering capacity for
Maximum capacity: CF card capacity -32M bytes
buffering
communication errors*2 (16 Mbytes to 512 Mbytes)
maximum*1, moving minimum*1)
Working
log
Log capacity for MES interface function
execution
Log capacity for job execution events
*1
*2
Section 6.7.3
Section 6.9.2
Maximum capacity: 1 Mbyte (CF card)
Section 6.11
Maximum capacity: 2 Mbytes (CF card)
[No. of samples] can be set up to 20.
How to estimate the buffering time from the buffering capacity is shown below.
Buffering time = (Allowable No. of bufferings)
(Frequency [times/hour]) [h]
Allowable No. of bufferings = (Capacity to be used)
SQL text length = Total field character length + 6
(SQL text length + Overhead (4 bytes)
No. of fields + Total data length + 20 [bytes]
[Calculation Example]
In the case of the capacity of 64 Mbytes, the field name of 16 characters, the data length of 32
characters, access to 256 fields by one action per job, and executing once per 30 seconds
SQL text length = (16
256) + 6
Allowable No. of bufferings = (64
Buffering time = 4846
3-2
3.1 Performance Specifications
(60
30
256 + (32
256) = 13844 [bytes]
1024
1024)
60)
40 [h]
(13844 + 4)
4846
1
OVERVIEW
3.2 GOT Devices Available for the MES Interface Function
The following are GOT devices that can be set in the Device tag settings of the MES
interface function.
GOT bit register
GOT data register
GOT special
register
Description
Available setting range
Bit register inside the GOT
GB64 to GB65535
Can be used as a bit device.
Data register inside the GOT
GD0 to GD65535
Can be used as a word device.
Special register inside the GOT
Stores GOT's internal information, communication status, error information, etc.
GS0 to GS1023*2
Can be used as a word device.
3
Used when making interaction between the MES interface function and the gateway function.
1-1: EG0 to 239-64:
SPECIFICATIONS
EG32767*3
another GOT.
Can be used as a word device.
*2
*3
For GB0 to GB63, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual
Do not write any value to a write-prohibited GOT special register.
Setting a value to the GOT special register may affect the GOT operation.
For the GOT special register, refer to the following manual.
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
*1
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual
Specify the gateway device in the following format.
(Network No.) - (Station No.): EG (Device No.)
Network No.: 1 to 239
Station No.: 1 to 64
Device No.: 0 to 32767
5
Point
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
The gateway function setting is required for use of the gateway devices.
For the gateway setting, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual (4.3 Connection Method)
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Gateway device
Virtual device for indirectly reading or writing the controller devices that are monitored by
2
*1
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Type
3.2 GOT Devices Available for the MES Interface Function
3-3
3.3 Function List and Setting Item List
This section provides the lists of the functions and setting items that can be set for the
MES interface function.
(1) MES interface function list
Function
Description
Reference
section
Section 5.1
DB interface function
Executes communication with the database in units of jobs.
Section 6.7
Section 6.8
Collects data in the internal devices or gateway devices of the GOT on the network in
Tag function
units of tags.
Assigning a database field to a tag component allows reading or writing of a database
Section 5.1.3
Section 6.5
value or device data that is specified by the tag component.
Trigger monitoring
Monitors values such as the time and tag values and, when the trigger condition
Section 5.1.4
function
changes from false to true (when the conditions are met), starts a job.
Section 6.7.2
Allows the system to buffer the data and the time that trigger conditions are met to the
user area of the GOT when too many trigger conditions (data transmission conditions)
Trigger buffering
are met simultaneously. The action (operation and transmission of the data) for the
Section 5.1.5
function
buffered data is executed later.
Section 6.7.1
Even when the data transmission triggers are activated frequently, no triggers are
missed so that all the jobs are executed.
Automatically creates an SQL text and communicates with the database.
SQL text transmission
(Communication action)
The following three types of commands can be selected for the SQL text.
• Select/MultiSelect
• Update
Section 5.1.6
Section 6.8.1
• Insert
Arithmetic processing
function
Allows operations of tag component values.
(Operation action)
Resource data send
Section 6.8.2
Sends the resource data collected in the GOT to the database.
Section 5.1.8
A SQL text (INSERT) is used for sending the resource data to the database.
Section 6.8.3
Program execution
Executes programs in the application server computer before execution of the first action
Section 5.1.9
function
and after execution of the last one in a job.
Section 6.7.3
Temporarily stores SQL texts into a CF card when they cannot be sent due to network
Section 5.1.10
function (Resource data
send action)
DB buffering function
disconnection or failure of the database server computer.
Section 6.9.2
After recovery, the buffered SQL texts are automatically sent to the database. (Manual
Section 6.10.4
operation is also possible.)
Section 6.10.5
SNTP time synchronization
Allows the time on the GOT to be synchronized with the time on the SNTP server
function
computer on the network.
Diagnostics function
DB server function
ODBC connection
function
Connection setting
function
Log output function
3-4
Section 5.1.7
Used to stop/restart the MES interface function, check job operations and configure the
settings.
Section 5.2
Section 6.9.1
Section 6.10
Allows direct access to a database upon request of the DB interface function.
Section 7.1
Executes the operation requested by the DB interface function or returns a response.
Section 7.2
Restricts IP addresses of GOTs that can be connected to the database.
Section 7.5
Outputs the execution status of DB Connection Service to the log.
Section 7.8
3.3 Function List and Setting Item List
1
same tag component.
Component setting
Configure the settings for assigning GOT devices to tags.
Section 6.5.3
Server service settings
Configure the settings for access to a server computer.
Section 6.6
Job settings
Configure the settings for the DB interface function.
Section 6.7
trigger conditions
Configure the settings for startup conditions of the job.
Trigger buffering
Set whether to utilize the trigger buffering function or not.
Section 6.7.1
Communication action
Configure the settings for communications with a database.
Section 6.8.1
Operation action
Configure the settings for operation of tag component values.
Section 6.8.2
Configure the settings for sending the resource data to the database.
Section 6.8.3
Resource data send
action
Section 6.7.2
program execution
Configure the settings for the program execution function.
Section 6.7.3
DB buffering
Set whether to utilize the DB buffering function or not.
Section 6.7.4
Execute a job as a one-shot task.
Section 6.7.6
One-shot execution
Option setting
Configure the SNTP time synchronization setting and the DB buffering function setting.
SNTP time
synchronization setting
DB buffering setting
diagnosis
Status
Section 6.9
Configure the settings for the SNTP time synchronization function.
Section 6.9.1
Configure the settings for the DB buffering function.
Section 6.9.2
Perform the remote diagnosis for the MES Interface function.
The operation status of the option OS (MES Interface) can be checked.
Section 6.10
Section 6.10.1
Operation
The operation status of the MES Interface function can be checked.
Section 6.10.2
Change Job Status
The job status can be changed.
Section 6.10.3
Connection result of
Connection with the server computer set in [Server Service setting], which is made at the
previous job execution
time of the previous job execution, can be displayed.
DB buffering operation
The DB buffering can be operated.
MESI/F Log
MES Interface Execute
Log
Job Execute Log
Section 6.11
Displays the MES Interface function execution log.
Section 6.11.1
Displays the job execution event log.
Section 6.11.2
(3) List of setting items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool
Function
DB access timeout
IP address setting
Reference
section
Specify the number of the port where the DB Connection Service operates.
requesting program execution or value writing/reading from the GOT to a database.
Set whether or not to output the access log.
Output SQL failed log
Set whether or not to output the SQL failure log.
6
Section 7.5
Connection Service is permitted.
Output access log
5
7
Set a timeout time (unit: seconds) used when no response may be returned after
Determine whether or not to restrict IP addresses of GOTs whose connection to DB
4
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Service port
Description
3
Section 6.10.4
Section 6.10.5
Displays the working log of the MES Interface function.
2
Section 6.5.2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Configure this setting when writing multiple records extracted from a database to the
Array setting
section
Section 6.5
SPECIFICATIONS
Configure the settings for the tag function.
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Device tag settings
Reference
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Description
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Function
OVERVIEW
(2) List of the MES interface setting items
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
3.3 Function List and Setting Item List
3-5
3.4 GOT Internal Device (GS)
3.4.1 GOT internal device list
The list of the GOT internal devices (GS) used for the MES interface module is shown
below.
Point
(1) For details of any other GOT internal devices (GS) than the shown areas used
for the MES interface function, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual
(2) Values stored in the GOT internal devices (GS) are cleared to 0 when the GOT
is powered OFF and then ON or is reset.
GS
Application
Name
Initial
Reference
value
section
SNTP time synchronization setting status
265
1: [Synchronize with SNTP]
0
0: [SNTP time synchronization setting not exist/failed]
266 to 272
SNTP time query result
273
MES interface
274
function
area
275
Use prohibited
0
-
-
Monitoring interval timeout count
0
670
No. of trigger buffer data
0
671
Trigger buffer overflow count
0
Trigger buffer overflow flag for a job
0
672 to 675
Section 3.4.2
Section 3.4.2
3.4.2 MES Interface Function area
This section explains the details of the special registers used for the MES interface
function.
(1) SNTP time synchronization setting status (GS265)
(a) The setting status of the SNTP time synchronization setting is stored.
For the SNTP time synchronization setting, refer to the following.
Section 6.9.1 Setting items in SNTP time synchronization setting
0: [SNTP time synchronization setting not exist/failed]
1: [Synchronize with SNTP]
(b) When the "Synchronize using SNTP" box is checked in the Option setting
This area is set when the clock time information was obtained from the SNTP
server computer.
If it could not be obtained from the SNTP server computer, this area is not set
since the operation for selection of [Synchronize with PLC CPU time] is performed
(The time is synchronized with the time of the PLC CPU).
3-6
3.4 GOT Internal Device (GS)
3.4.1 GOT internal device list
1
(Month)
The month data, 01 to 12, is stored.
268
SNTP time query result (Day)
The day data, 01 to 31, is stored.
269
SNTP time query result (Hour)
The hour data, 00 to 23, is stored.
270
271
SNTP time query result
(Minute)
SNTP time query result
(Second)
Setting side
The minute data, 00 to 59, is stored.
Set by the
system
3
The second data, 00 to 59, is stored.
SNTP time query result (Day of
0: Sunday 1: Monday 2: Tuesday
the week)
3: Wednesday 4: Thursday 5: Friday
SPECIFICATIONS
The day-of-the-week data is stored.
272
2
6: Saturday
4
(3) Monitoring interval timeout count (GS275)
The cumulative number of times that a monitoring interval timeout has occurred is
stored.
If monitoring interval timeout occurs frequently, check the number of job settings and
the trigger condition setting.
For the monitoring interval timeout, refer to the following:
Appendix 2 About Monitoring Interval Timeout
(4) No. of trigger buffer data (GS670)
The number of trigger buffer data is stored.
When many trigger buffer data is stored for a long time, the GOT becomes busy. As a
result, some data may not be collected.
Check the number of job settings for which [Trigger buffering] is enabled and the
trigger condition setting.
(5) Trigger buffer overflow count (GS671)
5
6
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
The cumulative number of times that a trigger buffer overflow has occurred is stored.
The trigger buffer overflow means that 129th trigger data is discarded without being
buffered when 128 trigger data is already buffered.
If trigger buffer overflow occurs frequently, check the number of job settings for which
[Trigger buffering] is enabled and the trigger condition setting.
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
SNTP time query result
Description
The four-digit year data is stored.
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
267
Name
SNTP time query result (Year)
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
GS
266
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
When the "Synchronize using SNTP" box is checked in in the Option setting, the time
information obtained from the SNTP server is stored.
OVERVIEW
(2) SNTP time query result (GS266 to GS272)
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
3.4 GOT Internal Device (GS)
3.4.2 MES Interface Function area
3-7
(6) Trigger buffer overflow flag for a job (GS672 to GS675)
The flag indicates the status of trigger buffer overflow for each job.
When a trigger buffer overflow occurs for a job, the internal device corresponding to
the job turns ON.
The following table shows the internal devices that are corresponding to jobs 1 to 64.
Name
GS672
Jobs 1 to 16
GS673
Jobs 17 to 32
GS674
Jobs 33 to 48
GS675
Jobs 49 to 64
3-8
Job and internal device
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
b8
b9
b10
b11
b12
b13
b14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
b8
b9
b10
b11
b12
b13
b14
b15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
b8
b9
b10
b11
b12
b13
b14
b15
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
b8
b9
b10
b11
b12
b13
b14
b15
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
3.4 GOT Internal Device (GS)
3.4.2 MES Interface Function area
b15
CHAPTER 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE USE
OF THE MES INTERFACE FUNCTION
This chapter explains the procedures and settings to be done before use of the MES
interface function.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
4.1 Settings and Procedures before Use of the MES Interface
Function
OVERVIEW
1
The flowcharts for use of the MES interface function are shown here.
3
SPECIFICATIONS
Point
Start the server computer, and then the GOT.
(1) Starting the server computer
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE USE OF THE
MES INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
Procedure before operation
Server computer/SNTP server computer
5
Application server computer *2
SNTP server computer *3
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Database server computer *1
Start up the SNTP server.
Install a relational database and design
a table. *4
Create a user program. *5
Set the ODBC of the database.
Create an account for user program
execution. *6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Section 7.2 Setting ODBC of
6
Database
Perform login check with the account
for user program execution. *7
Install DB Connection Service and
DB Connection Service Setting Tool.
Section 4.2 Installation and
Section 4.2 Installation and
Uninstallation
Uninstallation
Change the settings of DB Connection
Service.
Section 7.1 DB Connection
Section 7.1 DB Connection
Service Functions
Service Functions
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Change the settings of DB Connection
Service.
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Install DB Connection Service and
DB Connection Service Setting Tool.
Operation *8
4.1 Settings and Procedures before Use of the MES Interface Function
4-1
*1
Be sure to make the settings to use the DB interface function.
*2
Section 5.1 DB Interface Function
Make the settings when using the program execution function.
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
4-2
Section 5.1.9 Program execution function
Make the settings when using the time on the SNTP server computer with the SNTP time
synchronization function.
Section 5.2 SNTP Time Synchronization Function
Restart the personal computer after installing the relational database.
Communication with GOT may fail if not restarted.
Create it only when necessary.
An existing program, a program included in OS, or a commercially available program can also be
used.
Always set a password for the account for user program execution.
Use of an account without password will result in execution failure by OS.
If the login is not confirmed, the program execution function may not operate properly.
When installing DB Connection Service and DB Connection Service Setting Tool, log in using a
user name with administrative right.
Do not log in the server computer using an account for user program execution during user
program execution.
Doing so may cause incorrect operation of the program execution function.
4.1 Settings and Procedures before Use of the MES Interface Function
1
OVERVIEW
(2) Starting the GOT
Procedure for starting GOT
2
Connect to Ethernet. *2
Create project data. *3
Install a CF card.
(Only when needed)
Configure MES interface settings.
3
SPECIFICATIONS
Install GT Designer2.
Connect the GOT to the configuration computer.
(USB, RS-232, Ethernet) *4
Install the option OS on the GOT.
(Including MES interface)
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE USE OF THE
MES INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
Download the project data to the GOT.
(Including MES interface settings)
Operation start
*3
*4
5
6
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
*2
For GT16, use the MES interface function board.
For GT15, use the option function board with MES interface function.
For GT16, use the built-in Ethernet interface.
For connecting GT16 to a device supporting 10BASE(-T/2/5), configure the network that supports
both 10Mbps and 100Mbps communication speeds by using a switching hub.
For GT15, mount the Ethernet communication unit.
Configure the Extend I/F Setting in Communication Settings of GT Designer2.
In the Extend I/F Setting, select any of the following and set an IP address.
• CH: * Driver: Ethernet download
• CH: * Driver: Gateway
• CH: 1 Driver: Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700
• CH: 1 Driver: Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700,Gateway
When using the MES interface function only on the Ethernet, the GOT port No. setting in
Communication Detail Settings is ignored.
In Ethernet connection, the option OS cannot be installed.
To install the option OS, use USB or RS-232 connection.
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
*1
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Mount the option function board on the
*1
GOT.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
On the configuration computer
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Preparation of the GOT
4.1 Settings and Procedures before Use of the MES Interface Function
4-3
4.2 Installation and Uninstallation
For how to install and uninstall each execution software for the MES interface function on
the operating environment, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version
AND UNINSTALLATION)
4-4
4.2 Installation and Uninstallation
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (2. INSTALLATION
1
Point
The MES interface function settings are configured on the MES interface function
setting screen of GT Designer2.
Chapter 6 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION SETTING
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
The MES interface function can be used on the GOT by installing the option OS (MES
Interface).
This chapter describes the MES interface function.
OVERVIEW
CHAPTER 5 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION
3
SPECIFICATIONS
5.1 DB Interface Function
The DB interface function executes access to the database in units of jobs.
5.1.1 DB interface function operation
The operation of the DB interface function is shown below.
GOT
Tag 1
Job 1
5
Action *3
Communication action 1 (Update)
Operation action 2
Communication action 3 (Insert)
Resource data send action 4
Component
Database
Executed in
order
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Communication action 10 (Select)
Program execution *4
DB buffering *5
*1
Execute
file
Application server computer
*1
Collects tag data.
Section 5.1.3 Tag function
*2
*3
Activates a job.
Section 5.1.4 Trigger monitoring function
Accesses the database and performs arithmetic processing.
• Section 5.1.6 SQL text transmission (Communication action)
• Section 5.1.7 Arithmetic processing function (Operation action)
8
• Section 5.1.8 Resource data send function (Resource data send action)
*4
*5
Executes programs.
Section 5.1.9 Program execution function
Temporarily stores SQL texts that cannot be sent due to a communication error.
*6
Section 5.1.10 DB buffering function
For devices usable for the MES interface function, refer to the following.
Section 3.2 GOT Devices Available for the MES Interface Function
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.1 DB interface function operation
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
GD1000
Database server computer
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Trigger monitoring *2
TROUBLESHOOTING
Device *6
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
5-1
5.1.2 Job execution procedure
The following is the job execution procedure.
Start
Is the GOT working?
Stopped
No job is executed during the stop.
Activate the GOT.
Working
• Section 6.10.1 Checking the MES Interface
Function status (Status)
• Section 6.10.2 Manipulating the MES Interface
Function status (Operation)
Is the job enabled?
Disabled
Enabled
The job is not executed when it is disabled.
Enable the job.
• Section 6.10.3 Changing the job status (Change
job status)
Job execution starts when trigger conditions are met.
• Section 5.1.4 Trigger monitoring function
• Section 6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
When [Handshake operation] is selected for Trigger conditions,
tag component values are obtained again.
Is the [Execute
program before action.] box
checked?
Checked
The program in the application server computer is
executed before execution of the first action.
• Section 5.1.9 Program execution function
• Section 6.7.3 Setting items in Program
execution
(To the next page)
5-2
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.2 Job execution procedure
Not checked
1
(From the previous page)
OVERVIEW
Executed in order
Actions are executed.
Up to 10 actions can set for a job, and they are
executed in order.
• Section 5.1.6 SQL text transmission (Communication action)
2
• Section 5.1.7 Arithmetic processing function (Operation action)
• Section 5.1.8 Resource data send function (Resource data send
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
action)
• Section 6.8 Job Settings - Actions
In Update/Insert actions, substitute or insert values are
committed to database.
Is the [Execute
program after action.]
box checked?
3
SPECIFICATIONS
Not checked
Checked
The program in the application server computer is
executed after execution of the last action.
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
• Section 5.1.9 Program execution function
• Section 6.7.3 Setting items in Program execution
If a value was written to a tag component, it is written
to the device data of the PLC CPU.
Job execution is completed.
5
Point
For the case where an error occurs during job execution, refer to the following:
5.1.3 Tag function
The tag function collects device data of the GOTs on the network in units of tags.
Assigning a database field to a tag component allows reading or writing of a database
value or device data that is specified by the tag component.
For the tag function setting, refer to the following:
GOT
Device tag name: Process1
Read
Component name
Work_No.
Parameter
Device
GD1000
GD2000
Data type
Single
Double
8
Write
TROUBLESHOOTING
Device
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Section 6.5 Device Tag Settings
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
Section 5.3 (2) When an error occurs in job execution
GD1000
GD2000
GD2001
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
End
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.3 Tag function
5-3
5.1.4 Trigger monitoring function
The trigger monitoring function monitors values such as the time and tag values and, when
the trigger condition changes from false to true (when the condition is met), starts a job.
The following setting options are available as conditions for start.
• [Time specification startup]: Starts the job at the specified time.
• [Specified time period startup]: Starts the job at the specified intervals (Unit:
Seconds).
• [Value monitoring startup]:
Compares the actual tag component value with the condition value (tag component
value or constant value) at every sampling times, and starts the job when the
condition is met.
• [Handshake operation]:
Starts the job on request from the GOT.
Completion of job execution can be reported to the GOT.
• [At GOT startup]:
Starts the job only once when the GOT starts up.
Two kinds of conditions can be used in combination for starting a job.
For the trigger monitoring function setting, refer to the following:
Section 6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
Tag
Component
Value monitoring
startup
1st of every month, 9:00:00
3600 seconds
Time specification
startup
Specified time
period startup
Trigger
monitoring
Handshake
operation
ON
OFF
5-4
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.4 Trigger monitoring function
Conditions met Job startup
Job
1
In [Value monitoring startup], tag component values used for triggering monitoring
and those used in the activated job are collected at different timings without
synchronization.
2
Tag 1 Sampling cycle: 1s
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Sampling time 10:08:30
Tag 2 Sampling cycle: 60s
Trigger
When Tag 1Component A is 10
Action 1)
Add Tag 2 Component B to Tag 1 Component B.
Action 2)
Send Tag 3 Component C to database
Component name
Component B
Value
5
Sampling time 10:08:00
Tag 3 Sampling cycle: 1s
Component name
Component C
Component D
Component E
Component F
:
Value
12
3
4
8
:
3
Sampling time 10:08:21
(Too many components,
sampling delayed)
To synchronize collection of the above tag component values, perform either of
the following (Plan 1) or (Plan 2).
(Plan 1)
Use [Handshake operation].
Section 6.7.2 (8) Handshake operation
Tag 1 Sampling cycle: 1s
Trigger
When startup tag component turns ON
(Handshake
operation setting)
Action 1)
Add Tag 2 Component B to Tag 1 Component B.
Action 2)
Send Tag 3 Component C to database
Component name
Component A
Component B
Value
10
20
GOT device
5
Tag 2 Sampling cycle: 60s
Component name
Component B
Value
5
GOT device
Tag 3 Sampling cycle: 1s
Component name
Component C
Component D
Component E
Component F
:
Value
12
3
4
8
:
GOT device
6
(Plan 2)
Put the tag components used in a job into one tag.
Since the tag components collect the specified GOT device values during job
execution, the execution time of the job is increased.
7
Job
Action 1)
Add Tag 1 Component B' to Tag 1 Component B.
Action 2)
Send Tag 1 Component C to database
Value
10
20
5
12
3
4
8
:
Sampling time 10:08:21
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.4 Trigger monitoring function
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
When Tag 1Component A is 10
Component name
Component A
Component B
Component B'
Component C
Component D
Component E
Component F
:
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Tag 2 Sampling cycle: 3s
Trigger
4
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Job
SPECIFICATIONS
Value
10
20
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Component name
Component A
Component B
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Job
OVERVIEW
Point
5-5
5.1.5 Trigger buffering function
When too many trigger conditions (data transmission conditions) are met simultaneously,
the trigger buffering function allows the system to buffer the data and time trigger
conditions are met to the user area of the GOT. The action (operation and transmission of
the data) for the buffered data is executed later.
Even when the data transmission triggers are activated frequently, no triggers are missed
so that all the jobs are executed.
Enable [Trigger buffering] in each job setting to utilize the trigger buffering function.
(1) Trigger buffering function
The following describes the behavior of a job for which [Trigger buffering] is enabled.
(a) When normal (Interval that trigger conditions are met is longer than processing
time of action)
• When trigger conditions are met, the tag data and the time are stored in the
trigger buffer.
• The action, which is specified by the data stored in the trigger buffer, is
executed immediately.
[GOT]
[When normal]
Job 1
Trigger
conditions
are met
Trigger buffer
Time
5-6
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.5 Trigger buffering function
Job 1
Action is
executed
Time
Data
transmission
Database
(b) When busy (Interval that trigger conditions are met is shorter than processing time
of action)
• Tag data and time that conditions are met are stored to the trigger buffer
every time the conditions are met.
• If an action cannot complete before another condition is met, up to 128 trigger
data can be stored.
Job 1 ... 2) Trigger data (Tag data and time)
Database
Job 3 ... 3) Trigger data (Tag data and time)
Job 1 ... 1)
Action is
executed
The action for "Job 1 ... 1)" is executed.
The trigger data of "Job 1 ... 2)" and
"Job 3 ... 3)" is stored to the trigger buffer.
Job 3 ... 3)
Trigger conditions
are met
Time
3
SPECIFICATIONS
Job 1 ... 2)
Trigger conditions
are met
Time
4
The numbers 1) to 3) correspond to the order of that trigger conditions are met.
In this example, the jobs 1 and 3 access the same database.
[GOT]
[When becoming less busy]
Data
transmission
Job 1 ... 2)
Action is
executed
Job 3 ... 3)
Action is
executed
Time
6
Database
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Trigger buffer
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
(c) When becoming less busy (Interval that trigger conditions are met is longer than
processing time of action)
• The action, which is specified by the data stored in the trigger buffer, is read
and executed sequentially.
• When the action for the trigger data in the trigger buffer completes, the trigger
data is cleared, and another trigger data can be stored.
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Job 1 ... 1)
Trigger conditions
are met
Data
transmission
Trigger buffer
The action for "Job 1 ... 1)" is executed.
The action for "Job 1 ... 2)" and "Job 3 ... 3)",
which is specified by the data in the trigger
buffer, is executed sequentially.
Time
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
The numbers 1) to 3) correspond to the order of that trigger conditions are met.
In this example, the jobs 1 and 3 access the same database.
Point
(1) For job operation for which [Trigger buffering] is disabled, refer to the
following:
Section 5.3 (1) Operation behavior of jobs
(2) Whether the condition is changed from false to true is judged at collection of
the tag.
Section 6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.5 Trigger buffering function
5-7
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
[When busy]
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
[GOT]
OVERVIEW
1
(2) Maximum times of trigger buffering
(a) The trigger buffering function allows up to 128 trigger data (tag data and time) to
be stored simultaneously.
A job can be stored for unlimited number of times.
(b) Check status of the trigger buffering in the following.
Number of jobs in the trigger buffer (GS670)
[MES Interface] - [Diagnostics] tab (
buffering (Trigger buffering status))
Section 6.10.6 Checking the trigger
(c) If 128 conditions are already met and another condition is met, the trigger of the
new condition is discarded.
Check the number of discards in the trigger buffer overflow (GS671).
(3) Clearing trigger buffer
Any of the following operation clears the trigger buffer.
• Power off the GOT.
• Reset the GOT (when changing the communication settings, etc.)
• Install the OS from GT Designer2
• Download project data, etc.
• Stop the MES interface function operation by [MES Interface] - [Diagnostics]
(
5-8
Section 6.10.2 Manipulating the MES Interface Function status (Operation))
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.5 Trigger buffering function
1
5.1.6 SQL text transmission (Communication action)
OVERVIEW
The SQL text transmission function allows automatic creation of SQL texts, enabling
communications with the database.
The following three types of commands can be selected for the SQL text.
• Select/MultiSelect
• Update
• Insert
For the SQL text transmission setting, refer to the following:
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
Select/MultiSelect is used to write a database value to a tag component value area or
to store it in the temporary variable area by sending a SQL text to the database.
When a value is stored in the temporary variable area, it can be used as a variable for
other actions.
(2) Update and Insert
Update and Insert are used to add a tag component value or a temporary variable to
an SQL text and write the value to the database.
Database server computer
Select/MultiSelect
Tag Component
Temporary variable
Select...
3
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Select/MultiSelect
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Section 6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
5
Data
Tag Component
Temporary variable
Constant
Update...
Data
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Update
Database
Insert
Insert...
Data
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Tag Component
Temporary variable
Constant
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.6 SQL text transmission (Communication action)
5-9
5.1.7 Arithmetic processing function (Operation action)
The arithmetic processing function performs operations for tag component values.
In this function, up to 20 dyadic operations can be processed per operation action.
By storing an operation result in the temporary variable area, complicated operations are
also executable.
For the arithmetic processing function setting, refer to the following:
Section 6.8.2 Setting items in Operation action
An operand is selectable from
tag component, constant and
temporary variable.
Temporary
variable
Tag component
Constant
Tag component
Constant
Tag component
Temporary
variable
Tag component
Constant
Executed in order
5 - 10
The result can be
assigned to a tag
component or
temporary variable.
Four operations and
remainder can be specified
by corresponding operators.
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.7 Arithmetic processing function (Operation action)
Up to 20 dyadic operations
can be performed for one
operation action.
1
The resource data send function allows the GOT to send resource data collected in a GOT
buffering area and a CF card to a database.
Device values for controllers, alarm data for the GOT, and others can be stored to the
database without any communication programs.
For the resource data send function settings, refer to the following.
Data transmission
Database
SPECIFICATIONS
3
No Count
101 10
102 11
105 12
(a) Available data to be sent
For using the resource data send function, set [Transmit resource action] in the
action for [Job settings].
The following resource data can be sent to a database.
Resource data
Logging data
Advanced user alarm
Alarm data
Operation log data
Description
Logging data collected by the logging function
Alarm data collected by the advanced user alarm
observation setting
Advanced system
Alarm data collected by the advanced system alarm
alarm
observation setting
GOT operation history data collected by the operation
log function
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
(1) Resource data send function
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
Logging data, alarm data and others
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Time
08:20:10
08:30:20
08:30:30
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Section 6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
OVERVIEW
5.1.8 Resource data send function (Resource data send action)
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.8 Resource data send function (Resource data send action)
5 - 11
(b) Resource data to be sent
1) Settings on the resource data send action for the collected resource data
The GOT sends the resource data before and after turning on the GOT.
Specifying the number of resource data and the time of collecting the data or
others are available.
This setting allows the GOT to send resource data when the loads on the GOT
and controllers are lower.
[Resource data]
Data collected before
turning on GOT*
Sending data at
the first action
Turning on GOT
Data collected after
turning on GOT
First action
Data collected after the
first action
Second action
Data collected after the
second action
Third action
Sending data at
the second action
Database
Sending data at
the third action
*Excluding logging data at the first action
Point
The GOT sends the resource data to the database only one time. The GOT does
not send the sent data to the database on the subsequent actions. Unnecessary
data is not stored to the database.
The GOT may send the sent data to the database in the following cases.
• When turning on the GOT
• When restarting the GOT (Downloading a project data or others)
Section 6.12 Precautions
5 - 12
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.8 Resource data send function (Resource data send action)
2) Sending one resource data at the multiple resource data send actions
When one resource data is sent at the multiple resource data send actions, the
resource data is sent and stored to the database for each action.
[Resource data]
OVERVIEW
1
2
Data collected before
turning on GOT
Resource data for the first action B
First action A
Collected data
after turning on
GOT
Resource data for the second action B
Second action A
SPECIFICATIONS
3
First action B
Resource data for the second action A
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Turning on GOT
Resource data for the first action A
4
Second action B
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Resource data for the third action A
Third action A
Resource data for the action A is sent again when the action B is executed.
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.8 Resource data send function (Resource data send action)
5 - 13
5.1.9 Program execution function
The program execution function is used for executing programs in the application server
computer before execution of the first action and after execution of the last one in a job.
For the program execution function setting, refer to the following:
Section 6.7.3 Setting items in Program execution
Programs that can be executed from [Command line] are applicable.
Since program execution is set on the application server computer as described below,
more sophisticated data linkage can be realized.
(1) Before executing the first action of the job
By executing programs before the first action of the job, data required for the job can
be produced on the database in advance.
(2) After executing the last action of the job
By executing programs after the last action of the job, data written to the database by
the job can be utilized for programs on the application server computer.
5 - 14
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.9 Program execution function
1
The DB buffering function temporarily stores SQL texts into a CF card when they
cannot be sent due to network disconnection or failure of the database server
computer.
After recovery, the buffered SQL texts are automatically sent to the database. (Manual
operation is also possible.)
Disconnected
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(1) DB buffering function
OVERVIEW
5.1.10 DB buffering function
3
SPECIFICATIONS
Database
INSERT
INSERT
INSERT
UPDATE
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
CF card
Recovered
5
Resend
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Database
INSERT
INSERT
INSERT
UPDATE
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
CF card
(1) To automatically send SQL texts after recovery, irrespective of transmission
sequence, select the auto-resend processing.
This section (5)(c) Automatically resending data after recovery
(2) To send SQL texts after recovery, without changing the transmission
sequence, select the manual resend processing.
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
Point
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
This section (5)(d) Manually resending data
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.10 DB buffering function
5 - 15
(2) Factors for starting DB buffering
The DB buffering is conducted when SQL texts cannot be sent to the database by the
following factors:
• Network disconnection
• Failure of the database server computer
• Failure of the database software
Point
(1) If an error occurs when the sent SQL text is executed on the database, by
some reason such as its incorrectness or inconsistency with the database,
buffering is not performed and an SQL failure log is output on the database
server computer.
Section 7.1 DB Connection Service Functions
(2) When SQL texts cannot be sent to the database due to network disconnection
or failure of the database server computer, DB buffering is not performed until
the connection timeout is detected (approx. 10 seconds).
This section (7) When SQL texts cannot be sent to the database
Even if a trigger condition is met again during connection timeout detection,
the corresponding job is not executed.
Section 5.3 (1) Operation behavior of jobs
(3) If SQL texts cannot be sent to the database due to failure of database
software, DB buffering is not performed until detection of DB access timeout.
This section (7) When SQL texts cannot be sent to the database
Time for detecting DB access timeout is set to 30 seconds by default.
Section 7.5 (2) DB access timeout (required) (Range: 1 to 3600; Default:
30)
Even if a trigger condition is met again during detection of DB access timeout,
the corresponding job is not executed.
Section 5.3 (1) Operation behavior of jobs
(3) Jobs applicable to DB buffering
Jobs performing Update or Insert actions can be stored in the DB buffer.
The DB buffering is not available for jobs performing Select/MultiSelect action.
(4) Setting the DB buffering
Start
Configure the settings for the DB buffering function.
Section 6.9.2 Setting items in DB buffering settings
Set whether to enable or disable the DB buffering for
each job.
Section 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering
End
5 - 16
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.10 DB buffering function
1
OVERVIEW
(5) DB buffering operation
(a) When no data are currently stored in the DB buffer
Start
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Job execution starts when trigger conditions are met.
Section 5.1.2 Job execution procedure
Sent
This section (2) Factors for starting DB buffering
Sent to the database without being stored in the DB
buffer.
Not sent
Section 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering
Checked
Not checked
When disabled, the job execution is canceled without
DB buffering.
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Is the [Enable DB buffering]
box checked?
3
SPECIFICATIONS
Were the SQL texts sent
to the database?
Section 5.3 Precautions
DB buffering is started.
Point
• Section
6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering
• Section
6.10.5 Manipulating DB buffering (DB buffering operation)
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Check the DB buffer status (No. of bufferings, utilization) and prevent the full
status of the DB buffer.
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
End
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.10 DB buffering function
5 - 17
(b) When some data are currently stored in the DB buffer
Start
Job execution starts when trigger conditions are met.
Section 5.1.2 Job execution procedure
Yes
Is "Manual resend" selected
for the job?
Section 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering
No
Sent
Were the SQL texts sent
to the database?
(c) Automatically resending
This section (2) Factors for starting DB buffering
Not sent
Not checked
Is the [Enable DB buffering]
box checked?
When disabled, the job execution is canceled without
DB buffering.
Section 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering
Section 5.3 Precautions
Checked
DB buffering is started. *1
End
*1 When accumulated job data currently exist in the DB buffer.
DB buffer
Job settings
Job 1 (Auto)
Job 2 (Auto)
Job 3 (Auto)
Job 4 (Manual)
Job 5 (Manual)
Job 6 (Manual)
Stored in the order
that trigger conditions
are met.
Job 3_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 6_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 4_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 1_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 2_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 5_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Point
Check the DB buffer status (No. of bufferings, utilization) and prevent the full
status of the DB buffer.
5 - 18
•
Section 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering
•
Section 6.10.5 Manipulating DB buffering (DB buffering operation)
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.10 DB buffering function
1
(c) Automatically resending data after recovery
2)
In the order of storing the jobs data in the DB buffer,
the accumulated data of the jobs with Auto resend
setting are sent again. *1
Yes
3)
No
Job with Manual resend setting will not be sent even
after recovery.
(d) Manually resending data
End
4
*1 Automatically resends job data after recovery.
The numbers 1) to 3) correspond to those shown in the above.
Job settings
Job 1 (Auto)
Job 2 (Auto)
Job 3 (Auto)
Job 4 (Manual)
Job 5 (Manual)
Job 6 (Manual)
DB buffer
Database
Job 3_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 6_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 4_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 1_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 2_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 5_SQL TEXT (Manual)
3
SPECIFICATIONS
Is there any job for which
Manual resend is selected?
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Execution of the job with Auto resend setting is started.
The job with Auto resend setting is sent to the database
without being buffered. *1
Job 10_SQL TEXT (Auto)
2)
Job 3_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 1_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 2_SQL TEXT (Auto)
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
1)
OVERVIEW
Start
5
1)
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Job 10 (Auto)
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
3)
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.10 DB buffering function
5 - 19
(d) Manually resending data
Start
Execute manual resend of the DB buffer data.
Request for resend on [MES interface setting] - [Diagnosis]
tab
Request for resend on [Resend DB buffer request] of the
specified tag component
• Section 6.9.2 Setting items in DB buffering
settings
• Section 6.10.5 Manipulating DB buffering (DB
buffering operation)
After line recovery, retry the manual resend of DB buffer
data.
Not sent
Were the SQL texts sent
to the database?
• This section (2) Factors for starting DB buffering
Sent
1)
2)
In the order of storage in the DB buffer, the accumulated data
of the jobs with Manual resend setting are sent again. *1
If a job with manual resend setting is started during manual
resending, its SQL texts are stored in the DB buffer and then
sent to the database. *1
Not completed
3)
Has all the manual resend
processing been completed?
Completed
If a job with manual resend setting is started after completion
of manual resending, its SQL texts are sent to the database
if it is accessible, without being buffered. *1
Yes
Is there any job for which
Auto resend is selected?
Data of the job with Auto Resend setting are sent again
after recovery.
No
(c) Automatically resending data after recovery
End
*1 Manually resending data
The numbers 1) to 3) correspond to those shown in the above.
Job setting
DB buffer
Database
Job 1 (Auto)
Job 2 (Auto)
Job 3 (Auto)
Job 4 (Manual)
Job 5 (Manual)
Job 6 (Manual)
Job 3_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 6_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 4_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 1_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 2_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 5_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 10 (Manual)
Job 11 (Manual)
2)
3)
5 - 20
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.10 DB buffering function
1)
Job 6_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 4_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 5_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 10_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 11_SQL TEXT (Manual)
1
If any of the jobs for which manual resend is selected exists in the DB buffer, it
remains there after recovery until manual resend is executed.
OVERVIEW
Point
2
The DB buffer is cleared by the following:
• After downloading the project data, for which the MES interface function is set, to
the GOT, powering OFF and ON or restarting the GOT
• Clear request from [MES interface setting screen] - [Diagnosis tab].
Section 6.10.5 Manipulating DB buffering (DB buffering operation)
• Clear request from [Clear DB buffer request] of the specified tag component
1
If SQL texts cannot be sent to the database due to network disconnection or
failure of the database server computer or database software, the system starts
DB buffering after detection of a timeout.
2
After DB buffering is started, whether SQL texts can be sent to the database or
not is checked every time each job is activated.
3
When the system has not been recovered from network disconnection or failure
of the database server computer or database software, DB buffering is executed
after detection of the timeout.
Recovery from network
disconnection
Sending SQL
texts
Auto-resending
DB buffer data
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
DB buffering execution
after checking if SQL
texts can be sent
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
DB buffering executed
6
Job startup
After sending
SQL texts,
timeout detected
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Job startup
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
(a) When auto-send is selected for the job
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
(7) When SQL texts cannot be sent to the database
Job startup
3
SPECIFICATIONS
Section 6.9.2 Setting items in DB buffering settings
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(6) Clearing the DB buffer
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.10 DB buffering function
5 - 21
(b) When manual resend is selected for the job
1 If SQL texts cannot be sent to the database due to network disconnection or
failure of the database server computer or database software, the system starts
DB buffering after detection of a timeout.
2 After started, DB buffering is performed without checking whether SQL texts can
be sent to the database or not for each job activation.
3 The data stored in the DB buffer are resend when manual resend is executed.
Recovery from network
disconnection
Job startup
Job startup
Manual resend operation
After sending
SQL texts,
timeout detected
DB buffering executed
DB buffering executed
Resending DB buffer data
(8) Precaution on the DB buffering
Do not remove the CF card from the GOT during DB buffering.
5 - 22
5.1 DB Interface Function
5.1.10 DB buffering function
Section 6.9.1 Setting items in SNTP time synchronization setting
Point
For time synchronization with the SNTP server, pay attention to the following:
• When using the SNTP time synchronization function, do adjust the time in
the time setting in Utility or in System Environment of GT Designer2.
The SNTP time synchronization function does not work if the clock of the
GOT is set to be adjusted to the clock data of external equipment.
• To write the clock time of the SNTP server to controllers, use [Broadcast].
This function can be used in combination with [Broadcast].
SNTP time
synchronization
Time broadcast
4
Time adjustment
For [Adjust/Broadcast], refer to the following manual.
Screen Design Manual
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
GT Designer2 Version
3
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
SNTP server
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
The SNTP time synchronization function allows the time on the GOT to be synchronized
with the time on the SNTP server computer on the network.
Time information is utilized for job start conditions or in send data to the database.
For the SNTP time synchronization function setting, refer to the following.
SPECIFICATIONS
5.2 SNTP Time Synchronization Function
OVERVIEW
1
5.2 SNTP Time Synchronization Function
5 - 23
5.3 Precautions
(1) Operation behavior of jobs
(a) When a trigger condition for a job is met again during execution of the job
1) Jobs for which [Trigger buffering] is disabled
A new job is not executed during execution of the previous job.
(Example)
When a trigger condition for a job is met again during execution of the job set
to [Value monitoring startup]
Condition value
Interval
of tag
sampling
Tag component value
Job
startup
Job
startup
Job
startup
2)
Job execution 1)
:Trigger conditions are met
:Job is not started after trigger
conditions are met
3)
A new job is not executed during execution of the previous job.
2) Jobs for which [Trigger buffering] is enabled
Trigger data is stored to the trigger buffer, and the job for the stored trigger
data is executed after completion of the previous job.
(Example)
When a trigger condition for a job is met again during execution of the job set
to [Value monitoring startup]
Condition value
Interval
of tag
sampling
Tag component value
:Trigger conditions
are met
Trigger data 2)
3)
Trigger buffer
4)
Job
startup
Job
startup
Job execution 1)
2)
Job
startup
3)
Job
startup
4)
Job
startup
5)
(b) When trigger conditions for multiple jobs are met concurrently
• Up to three jobs can start their executions concurrently in the order in [Job
settings].
• After completion of these jobs, executions of the other jobs are started
sequentially.
Note that, if a job uses the same item in [Server service settings] that is
currently used for another job, the job is not executed until another job
execution is completed.
5 - 24
5.3 Precautions
(c) When actions are set for a job
When actions are set for a job, if a communication error occurs, a timeout time will
be generated.
In the case of multiple action settings, timeout time is generated for each action.
For the timeout time, refer to the following.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool
OVERVIEW
1
Job execution
Program execution (before actions)
Action 1
Action 2
No. of communications Timeout time
No. of communications:Total number of set communication actions and program
executions
Example) Time taken until completion of a job in the event of a communication
error
No. of communications: 10 + 1 + 1 = 12
5
Item
Setting
Communication action
12
Program execution (before action)
1
Program execution (after action)
Timeout
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
30s = 360s
1
6
30 seconds
(d) Monitoring interval timeout
Depending on the number of set jobs or the trigger condition setting, the
monitoring interval timeout may be generated.
Appendix 2 About Monitoring Interval Timeout
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Time taken until job completion: 12
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Timeout time occurs for each.
The time taken until completion of the job is obtained from the formula shown
below.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
Action 10
Program execution (after actions)
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
5.3 Precautions
5 - 25
(2) When an error occurs in job execution
(a) The job execution is canceled when the error cause is the following:
• Failure in device data writing due to network disconnection within the PLC
system
• Failure in device data writing, or operation error
• Failure in access to the database (Except jobs for which [Enable DB
buffering] is selected)
Section 5.1.10 DB buffering function
(b) If a job execution is canceled, the operation processed before the error
occurrence returns to the status before the job execution.
Remark
The following explains access to GOT device data and the database.
(1) GOT device data
Since all of data are written to the device data area in the GOT at a time upon
completion of job execution, any change due to the error is not reflected in the
device data of the GOT.
(2) Database
Rollback is executed assuming the time immediately before job activation as
a commit point.
However, when the database is Wonderware Historian, rollback is not
executed.
When an error occurs during inserting data into a database, the data inserted
into the database before occurring the error are reflected.
(c) When [Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution] has been
selected, a value is assigned to the specified tag component.
Section 6.7.5 Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution
5 - 26
5.3 Precautions
1
OVERVIEW
CHAPTER 6 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION SETTING
This chapter explains the setting of the MES interface function.
6.1 MES Interface Function Setting Screen
The MES interface function setting screen is a screen for configuring various settings
required for the MES interface function.
In addition, the operation status of the MES interface function and the working log can be
checked, and other operations such as stop/restart of the MES interface function can be
also performed.
For how to start GT Designer2, refer to the following manual.
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (2.4. Starting
2 Perform the following:
• Select [Common]
[MES Interface] from the menu.
3 The MES interface screen is displayed. Configure the settings referring to the
following descriptions.
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
1 Start GT Designer2.
GT Designer2 Version
the Software)
3
SPECIFICATIONS
6.2 Displaying the MES Interface Function Setting Screen
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.1 MES Interface Function Setting Screen
6-1
6.3 Screen Structure
This section explains the structure of the MES interface function setting screen.
6.3.1 Screen structure
Title bar
Tab
Edit items tree
Section 6.3.2
Operations using
the Edit items tree
Detailed setting
edit screen
Remark
(1) Display on the title bar
On the title bar, the status of connection to the GOT is displayed.
The connection status displays are shown below.
Connection type
Display
RS232
(Connect Type RS232 COM1)
USB
(Connect Type USB)
Ethernet
(Connect Type Ethernet 192.168.3.10)
Remarks
Displays the communication
port.
Displays the IP address.
(2) Column width adjustment
The column width of the tables can be adjusted on the MES interface function
setting screen.
To adjust the width, drag the right boundary line of the column.
When only a part of a long item name is displayed, this adjustment is useful.
6-2
6.3 Screen Structure
6.3.1 Screen structure
1
6.3.2 Operations using the Edit items tree
OVERVIEW
The Edit items tree shows overall MES interface function settings in a tree.
This section explains the operations using the Edit items tree.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
Project root
Item
3
SPECIFICATIONS
Setting type
2
Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed
setting edit screen area.
(2) Adding an item
1
2
Selecting an item or a setting type to be added and performing either of the
following will add the item.
• Select an item of the same type or a setting type, right-click the mouse, and
choose [Add].
• Double-click a setting type that contains no item.
When the item is added properly, it is automatically selected and the edit screen
is switched to the one for the added item.
Point
Since the number of items that can be added is limited depending on the setting
type, refer to the relevant section of each item.
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
When double-clicking the project root or each setting type, some items are
displayed.
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
1
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
(1) Selecting an item
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.3 Screen Structure
6.3.2 Operations using the Edit items tree
6-3
(3) Deleting an item
1 Select an item to be deleted and right-click the mouse. Selecting [Delete] deletes
the item.
Point
For precautions on the item deletion, refer to the following.
Section 6.12 (2) When deleting an item
(4) Replicating an item
1 Select an item to be copied, right-click it to display the menu. Selecting [Copy &
Paste] replicates the item.
2 When the item is added properly, it is automatically selected and the edit screen
is switched to the one for the added item.
Point
Since the number of items that can be added is limited depending on the setting
type, refer to the relevant section of each item.
6-4
6.3 Screen Structure
6.3.2 Operations using the Edit items tree
1
OVERVIEW
6.4 Setting
Configure the settings for the MES interface function.
1 Click the "Setting" tab.
2
2 The "Setting" sheet is displayed on the detailed setting edit screen.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
3 For each of the setting items, refer to the section shown below.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
Device tag settings
Reference
Description
section
Configure the settings for the tag function.
Section 6.6
Server service settings
Configure the settings for access to a server computer.
Section 6.7
Job settings
Configure the settings for the DB interface function.
Section 6.8
Configure the SNTP time synchronization setting and the DB buffering function
setting.
Section 6.9
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Option Setting
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Item
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
6.4 Setting
6-5
6.5 Device Tag Settings
Configure the settings for the tag function.
For the tag function, refer to the following:
Section 5.1.3 Tag function
Configured tags are used in [Job settings], etc.
1 Double-clicking [Device tag settings] in the Edit items tree displays relevant items.
2 Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed
setting edit screen area.
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.
Point
(1) How to add, delete, or copy an item
For addition, deletion or copying of items, refer to the following:
Section 6.3.2 Operations using the Edit items tree
(2) When an item is added or copied, a "New Tag" item is added.
6-6
6.5 Device Tag Settings
1
6.5.1 Setting items in Device tag settings
OVERVIEW
Up to 64 items can be set in [Device tag settings] within one project.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
Item
Component list
Array block size
No. of tag components in
project
No. of statistical
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Component setting input
4
Set a sampling interval to sample the tag.
Set whether to use arrays for the tag or not.
Section 6.5.2 Setting items in Array setting
Configure the tag component settings.
Section 6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting
Displays a list of the components that have been already set.
Section 6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting
5
Make setting when changing the block size manually.
Displays the number of all the tag components in the project.
Displays the number of the components in the project, for which [Perform
processings in project
statisticcal processing] is selected.
No. of device points in tag
Displays the number of total device points used in [Device Tag setting].
6
(1) Device tag name (Up to 16 characters)
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Enter a device tag name.
Configured tags are used in [Job settings], etc.
For characters that can be used for device tag names, refer to the following:
Appendix 2 About Monitoring Interval Timeout
Note that using the name same as the one set in [Server service settings] is not
allowed.
7
(2) Sampling setting
(a) When sampling is enabled
The tag is sampled in the specified interval.
When selecting [Sampling], also set a sampling interval in units of seconds. The
setting range for the interval is 1 to 32767 seconds.
(b) When sampling is disabled
The tag is not sampled.
When [Do not sample] is selected, statistical processing cannot be performed for
tag component values.
6.5 Device Tag Settings
6.5.1 Setting items in Device tag settings
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Array setting
Set whether to periodically sample the tag or not.
6-7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Sampling setting
Description
Enter a device tag name. (Up to 16 characters)
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Device tag name
SPECIFICATIONS
3
Point
(1) The GOT becomes less busy if [Do not sample] is selected for the following
tags.
• Tags only for writing
• Tags for sampling device values with the handshake operation.
For the handshake operation, refer to the following:
Section 6.7.2 (8) Handshake operation
(2) When [Do not sample] is selected, the setting items for reading tags cannot
be selected for the tag. (Except cases that [Handshake operation] is set for
the trigger conditions.)
• Tag component values that are set in [Select/Update conditions] in
[Select] of [Communication action]
(3) When [Array setting] is set for the tag, [Do not sample] is fixed for the
sampling setting.
6-8
6.5 Device Tag Settings
6.5.1 Setting items in Device tag settings
1
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
3
SPECIFICATIONS
An array is a data format, in which the specified number of data of the same data type are
arranged sequentially.
The Array setting is set when writing multiple records extracted from a database to the
same tag component.
Either of the following can be selected for device assignment to each tag component.
• Assigning consecutive devices to each tag component (series)
• Handling all tag components as a block and assigning the same kind of devices in a
series of blocks (block)
Tags with array settings are used for [MultiSelect].
Section 6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
OVERVIEW
6.5.2 Setting items in Array setting
(1) Use array
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
When the [Use array] checkbox is checked, the tag is arranged as arrays.
Point
(1) When the array setting is set, device data are not collected.
(2) The array setting is unavailable for the tags set for the actions in [Job
settings].
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
(2) Length of array (Range: 2 to 40000, Default: 2)
Set the number of arrays for the tag.
(3) Series/Block (Default: Series)
Select a method for the array setting.
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
(a) Series
Devices of respective tag components are arranged consecutively.
(Example)When [Length of array] is set to 4 with [series] setting
Devices in and after n=2 are configured automatically.
Component A
Component B
Component C
n=1
n=2
GB0
GB1
GD100
to GD101
GD102
to GD103
GD1000
GD1004
to GD1003 to GD1007
n=3
n=4
GB2
GB3
GD106
GD104
to GD105 to GD107
GD1008 GD1012
to GD1011 to GD1015
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Only the start device (device in n=1) need be set.
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.5 Device Tag Settings
6.5.2 Setting items in Array setting
6-9
(b) Block
Devices of all tag components are arranged as a block.
The size of the block can be changed in [array block size].
For [array block size], refer to the following.
Section 6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting
Usually, the block size need not be changed because it is automatically adjusted
to avoid device duplication.
(Example) When [Length of array] is set to 4 with [block] setting
Only the start device (device in n=1) need be set.
Devices in and after n=2 are configured automatically
Component A
n=1
n=2
GD0
GD7
n=3
n=4
GD14
GD21
Component B
GD1 to GD2 GD8 to GD9
GD15 to GD16 GD22 to GD23
Component C
GD3 to GD6 GD10 to GD13 GD17 to GD20 GD24 to GD27
Block
Point
When device types are different, [block] cannot be selected.
For the device types, refer to the following.
Section 3.2 GOT Devices Available for the MES Interface Function
6 - 10
6.5 Device Tag Settings
6.5.2 Setting items in Array setting
1
6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting
OVERVIEW
Configure the settings for assigning GOT devices to tags.
Up to 256 components can be set for one tag.
Up to 4096 components can be set for one project.
(Modifying a component)
• When a component to be modified is selected in [Component list], its settings are
displayed in [Component setting input].
• Modify the item settings in [Component setting input], and click the Replace
button.
(Deleting a component)
• Select a component to be deleted in [Component list], and click the Delete button.
(Deleting the settings in [Component setting input])
3
SPECIFICATIONS
• Set required items in [Component setting input], and click the Add button.
• The component is added in [Component list].
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
(Adding a component)
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
• Clicking the Clear button deletes the settings in [Component setting input].
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.5 Device Tag Settings
6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting
6 - 11
Item
Description
Component name
Enter a component name. (Up to 16 characters)
Head device
Set device name.
Component Data type
setting
Character string
input
length
Perform statistical
processing
Select the data type of the sampling data.
Set a character string length when [String] is selected for [Data type].(1 to 32
characters)
Set whether to perform statistical processing or not.
Component name
Displays a component name.
Device
Displays a device range used.
Data type
Displays a data type.
Statistical type
When [Perform statistical processing] is set, displays the type of statistical
processing.
When [Array setting] is set, displays the device range of array No.n.
For a display example, refer to the following.
Device [n]
Section 6.5.2 Setting items in Array setting
n (Arrray No.)
<
Component
List
<
Displays the array No. that is currently displayed in [Device [n]] of
[Component List].
button
If this is clicked, the device range of the first array is displayed in [Device [n]] of
[Component List].
When the device range of the first array is already displayed, this button cannot be
clicked.
button
If this is clicked, the device range of the previous array is displayed in [Device [n]] of
[Component List].
When the device range of the first array is already displayed, this button cannot be
clicked.
button
If this is clicked, the device range of the next array is displayed in [Device [n]] of
[Component List].
When the device range of the last array is already displayed, this button cannot be
clicked.
button
If this is clicked, the device range of the last array is displayed in [Device [n]] of
[Component List].
When the device range of the last array is already displayed, this button cannot be
clicked.
>
<
Selecting a component in [Component List] and clicking the
button
The
button cannot be clicked on the first component.
Selecting a component in [Component List] and clicking the
button
button reverses the
order between the selected component and the one immediately below it.
The
Array block size
button reverses the
order between the selected component and the one immediately above it.
button cannot be clicked on the last component.
Make setting when changing the block size manually.
Point
The following are displayed on the status bar of [Device Tag setting].
• [No. of tag components in project]
The total number of tag components in the project is displayed.
• [No. of statistical processings in project]
The number of component settings in the project, for which [Perform
statistical processing] is checked, is displayed.
• [No. of device points in tag]
The total number of device points used in [Device tag settings] is
displayed.
Up to 40000 device points can be set for a tag with [Array setting].
6 - 12
6.5 Device Tag Settings
6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting
1
Enter a component name.
For characters that can be used for component names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.2 Characters applicable to item names, component names, variable
names, etc.
• Set a device type and an actual device number.
• Bit specification is not allowed for word devices.
• For accessible devices, refer to the following:
Section 3.2 GOT Devices Available for the MES Interface Function
Selectable
Device
Single word
Handles data as single word data (16-bit Integer type).
Word
Double word
Handles data as double word data (32-bit Integer type).
Word
Real number
Handles data as floating point data.
Word
Bit
Handles data as bit data (in units of bits (0/1)).
String*1
Handles data as character strings.
Bit
Word
When [Data type] is [String], device values are processed as follows:
• When the device value is not an ASCII code or JIS code
It is replaced with "." (period: 2EH).
• When the device value is a model-dependent character
The character code may be converted when an action is executed.
6
(4) Character string length (2 to 32 characters)
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
(a) Set a character string length when [String] is selected for [Data type].
(b) When [String] is selected, data are stored as follows:
1) When the value length is shorter than the character string length
NULL codes (00H) are stored after the stored values.
Example: "ABCD" is stored in the device of the tag component, whose
character length is 8.
C
7
D
41h 42h 43h 44h 00h 00h 00h 00h
2) When the value length is longer than the character string length
The values whose quantity is equal to the character string length are stored.
Example: "ABCD" is attempted to be stored in the device of the tag
component, whose character length is 2.
"AB"
(c) Odd numbers are not allowed for the character string length setting.
Set an even number for the character string length.
6.5 Device Tag Settings
6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting
6 - 13
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
B
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
Appendix 1.2 Characters applicable to item names, component names, variable names,
etc.
• When the device value is a termination character (NULL code: 00H)
The character data following it are ignored. (The character string is regarded as terminated.)
A
4
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
*1
Description
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Select the data type of the sampling data (device data).
SPECIFICATIONS
3
(3) Data type
Item
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(2) Device
OVERVIEW
(1) Component name (Up to 16 characters)
(5) Perform statistical processing
(a) Set whether to perform statistical processing or not.
Up to 64 components that have [Perform statistical processing] setting can be set
in all projects. (Check [No. of statistical processings in project] on the status bar.)
When the [Perform statistical processing] box is checked, statistical processing is
performed for tag component values.
Statistically processed values can be used by specifying the tag component
values, for which [Perform statistical processing] is selected, in [Job setting].
Note that this setting is not available when:
• [Do not sample] is selected in [Sampling setting].
• The data type of the tag component is [String].
• [Array setting] is set.
(b) When [Perform statistical processing] is selected, set the following items.
Item
Statistical type
No. of samples
Description
Select a type of the statistical processing.
Specify the number of samples when [Moving average], [Moving
maximum], or [Moving minimum] is selected.
1) Statistical type
Select a type of the statistical processing.
Item
Average
*1
Maximum*1
Minimum
*1
Description
An average value after starting sampling
The maximum value after starting sampling
The minimum value after starting sampling
An average of the tag component values that are collected at
sampling intervals for the number of times specified by [No. of
Moving average*2 *3
samples]
Since the processing range moves at each sampling, the latest value
can be obtained.
The maximum value in the tag component values that are collected
at sampling intervals for the number of times specified by [No. of
Moving maximum*2 *3
samples]
Since the processing range moves at each sampling, the latest value
can be obtained.
The minimum value in the tag component values that are collected at
sampling intervals for the number of times specified by [No. of
Moving
minimum*2 *3
samples]
Since the processing range moves at each sampling, the latest value
can be obtained.
6 - 14
6.5 Device Tag Settings
6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting
Section 6.8.2 Setting items in Operation action
The statistical processing is reset and a value processed after the substitution is stored.
Statistical values of [Moving average], [Moving maximum], and [Moving minimum] cannot be reset.
When a tag component having [Moving average], [Moving maximum], or [Moving minimum]
setting is specified in a job, the job is not activated until data are collected for the specified number
of times after start of sampling.
(Moving average when [No. of samples] is 4)
Device value
2)
3)
Sampling interval
4)
1)
5)
6)
7)
9)
8)
4
12)
10) 11)
Tag component value
1st
2nd
3rd
Moving average
5
Time (seconds)
0
3
SPECIFICATIONS
2) No. of samples (2 to 20)
Specify the number of samples when [Moving average], [Moving maximum], or
[Moving minimum] is selected.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
*2
*3
If a statistical value of [Average], [Maximum], or [Minimum] is reset, a value obtained after resetting
will be stored.
• How to reset a statistical value of [Average], [Maximum], or [Minimum]
Perform substitution of some value for the relevant tag component using [Operation action] of a
job.
For operation actions, refer to the following:
1st
2nd
3rd
2 )+3)+4 )+5)
3 )+4)+5 )+6)
4
4
4
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
<Change in tag component values>
1)+2 )+3)+4 )
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
*1
OVERVIEW
1
(6) n (Array No.)
When [Array setting] is set, the device range of array No.n, is displayed in [Device [n]]
of [Component List].
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
7
,
,
, or
button.
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Change the value with the
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
To change the [Device [n]] display, use the following methods.
• Enter a value in the box.
6.5 Device Tag Settings
6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting
6 - 15
(7) Array block size
When [block] is selected in [Array setting], [array block size] setting is available.
Usually, the block size need not be changed because the it is automatically adjusted
to avoid duplication of components.
Change [array block size] when:
• Setting a desired number for the start device No. of each block.
• Adding any component in the future.
The following example explains the cases where [array block size] is manually set and
is not set.
(Example) When [Component D] is to be added in the future
• When 10 is set for [array block size], device numbers are not changed.
• When nothing is set for [array block size], device numbers in and after array
No.2 are changed.
[When the size is set]
(Array block size = 10)
Planned to
be added
Component name Device
Data type
Component A
GD0
Single word
Component B
GD1
Double word
Component C
GD3 String (12 characters)
Component D
GD9
Single word
Component A
Component B
Component C
Component D
n=1
n=2
n=3
GD0
GD1 to GD2
GD3 to GD8
GD9
GD10
GD11 to GD12
GD13 to GD18
GD19
GD20
GD21 to GD22
GD23 to GD28
GD29
n=2
n=3
[When the size is not set]
n=1
Component A
GD0
Component B
GD1 to GD2
Component C
GD3 to GD8
Component D
GD9
GD18
GD9
GD20
GD10
GD10 to GD11 GD19 to GD20
GD11 to GD12 GD21 to GD22
GD12 to GD17 GD21 to GD26
GD13 to GD18 GD23 to GD28
GD19
GD29
(8) Precautions on [Component setting]
If a wrong device number is set for a component in [Component setting], an error will
occur on another component that has the same access target CPU setting.
Correct the device number in [Component setting].
6 - 16
6.5 Device Tag Settings
6.5.3 Setting items in Component setting
1
OVERVIEW
6.6 Server Service Settings
1 Double-clicking [Server Service setting] in the Edit items tree displays relevant items.
2 Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed
setting edit screen area.
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Configure the settings for the access to a server computer.
The set server service name is used in [Job setting].
SPECIFICATIONS
3
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
Point
(1) How to add, delete, or copy an item
For addition, deletion or copying of items, refer to the following:
Section 6.3.2 Operations using the Edit items tree
(2) When an item is added or copied, a "NewServer" item is added.
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.6 Server Service Settings
6 - 17
6.6.1 Setting items in Server service settings
Up to 8 items can be set in [Server service settings] within one project.
Item
Sever service name
Server type
IP address
Port No.
User name
Description
Enter a server service name. (Up to 16 characters)
Select the server type of the server computer to be accessed.
Enter a decimal IP address of the server computer where DB Connection
Service is installed.
Set a port number of the server computer.
(Range: 1024 to 65535, Default: 5112)
Set a user name used to access the server computer.
(Up to 30 characters)
Password/Confirm
Set a password used to access the server computer.
password
(Up to 30 characters)
Data source name
Set the name of the ODBC data source to be accessed.
Database type
Select the type of the database server.
Access error notification
setting
Set whether to enable or disable notification of the access error status.
In case a connection error occurs on the network between the GOT and
Connection timeout
the server computer, set a timeout time during which the GOT will detect
the error.
(Range: 1 to 180 seconds, Default: 10 seconds)
6 - 18
6.6 Server Service Settings
6.6.1 Setting items in Server service settings
1
(2) Server type
3
(a) Select the server type of the server computer to be accessed.
(b) When [Database server] is selected, set the following items.
Item
Description
Set the name of the ODBC data source to be accessed.
For characters that can be used for data source names, refer to the
Data source name
following:
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table
names, etc.
Select the type of the database server.
Database type
• Oracle 8i
• Oracle 9i
• SQL Server 2000/2005 • MSDE2000
• Access2003/2007
• Wonderware
• Oracle 10g
5
• Access2000
Historian
(3) IP address
Enter a decimal IP address of the server computer where DB Connection Service is
installed.
6
(4) Port No. (Range: 1024 to 65535, Default: 5112)
Set a port number of the server computer.
Set the same value in [Port No.] as the one set in [Service port] of DB Connection
Service.
Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool
7
(5) User name (Up to 30 characters)
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Set a user name used to access the server computer.
For characters that can be used for user names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.3 Characters applicable to character string constants, etc.
(a) When [Database server] is selected for [Server type]
Set a user name that is required for ODBC access.
(b) When [Application server] is selected for [Server type]
Set the account user name used for the operating system (OS) of the application
server computer.
6.6 Server Service Settings
6.6.1 Setting items in Server service settings
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Used in [Program execution] of [Job setting].
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Used in [Communication action] of [Job setting].
Application server
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Database server
SPECIFICATIONS
Description
6 - 19
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Item
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Enter a server service name.
The set server service name is used in [Job setting].
For characters that can be used for server service names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.2 Characters applicable to item names, component names, variable
names, etc.
Note that using the name same as the one of the device tags set in [Device tag
settings] is not allowed.
OVERVIEW
(1) Server service name (Up to 16 characters)
(6) Password/Confirm password (Up to 30 characters)
Set a password used to access the server computer.
For characters that can be used for passwords, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.3 Characters applicable to character string constants, etc.
(7) Access error notification setting
(a) [Notify the access error status.]
Set whether to enable or disable notification of the access error status.
If the [Notify the access error status.] box is checked, an error occurred in access
to the server computer is reported to a tag component.
(b) When [Notify the access error status.] is selected, choose a tag component into
whose device the access error status data is stored.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
Data are stored as follows depending on the data type.
Data type of tag
Description
component
OFF: Normal/Not accessed/Network line disconnected
Bit
ON: Access error status
"0": Normal/Not accessed/Network line disconnected
String
"1": Access error status
Other than the above
0: Normal/Not accessed/Network line disconnected
1: Access error status
(8) Connection timeout (Range: 1 to 180 seconds, Default: 10 seconds)
In case a connection error occurs on the network between the GOT and the server
computer, set a timeout time during which the GOT will detect the error.
Usually, this setting is not needed.
In any of the following cases, adjust the connection timeout time if necessary.
(a) Reduce the connection timeout time to:
• Make the time elapsed from occurrence of a connection error to the start of
DB buffering shorter.
• Make the time elapsed from occurrence of a connection error to notification of
an access error and job cancellation shorter.
(b) Increase the connection timeout time when:
• A connection timeout occurs in spite of normal network condition.
Point
The relation of the values set for [Connection timeout] and [DB access timeout
time] in [DB Connection Service Setting Tool] must be as follows:
• Connection timeout value
6 - 20
6.6 Server Service Settings
6.6.1 Setting items in Server service settings
DB access timeout value
1
OVERVIEW
6.7 Job Settings
Configure the settings for the DB interface function.
For the DB interface function, refer to the following:
Section 5.1 DB Interface Function
2 Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed
setting edit screen area.
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
1 Double-clicking [Job settings] in the Edit items tree displays relevant items.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
Point
(1) How to add, delete, or copy an item
For addition, deletion or copying of items, refer to the following:
Section 6.3.2 Operations using the Edit items tree
(2) When an item is added or copied, a "New Job" item is added.
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.7 Job Settings
6 - 21
6.7.1 Setting items in Job settings
Up to 64 items can be set in [Job settings] within one project.
For job operations, refer to the following:
Section 5.3 Precautions
6 - 22
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.1 Setting items in Job settings
1
Description
Enter a job name. (Up to 16 characters)
GOT Initializing
Set whether to enable the job at startup of the GOT or not.
Trigger buffering
Set whether to enable the trigger buffering or not.
Startup logging
Set whether to output the startup history of the job to the log or not.
Test mode
Set whether to operate the job in test mode or not.
Notify errors (job
cancellation) that occur
during job execution
No. of fields in project
Tag component data length
in job
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Section 6.8 Job Settings - Actions
Configure the settings for the program execution function.
Section 6.7.3 Setting items in Program execution
3
Configure the settings for the DB buffering function.
Section 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering
Set whether to enable or disable notification of errors (job cancellation) that
occur during job execution.
Section 6.7.5 Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job
execution
Displays the total number of fields in the project.
SPECIFICATIONS
DB buffering
Section 6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
Configure the action settings.
4
Displays the total data length of the tag components in the job.
(1) Job name (Up to 16 characters)
Enter a job name.
For characters that can be used for job names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.2 Characters applicable to item names, component names, variable
names, etc.
(2) GOT Initializing
(a) Set whether to enable the job at startup of the GOT or not.
If the [GOT Initializing] box is not checked, the job is disabled at startup of the
GOT. (Even if trigger conditions are met, the job is not executed.)
(b) When the GOT is ON, the enable/disable setting of the job can be changed in
[Change Job Status] on the [Diagnosis] tab.
Section 6.10.3 Changing the job status (Change job status)
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Program execution
Configure the settings for startup conditions of the job.
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Action
2
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Trigger conditions
OVERVIEW
Item
Job name
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.1 Setting items in Job settings
6 - 23
(3) Trigger buffering
(a) Set whether to enable the trigger buffering function or not.
For the trigger buffering function, refer to the following:
Section 5.1.5 Trigger buffering function
(b) Precautions for enabling [Trigger buffering]
• [Handshake operation] cannot be selected for the trigger conditions.
• A tag component cannot be selected for the substitution tag in [Operation
action].
• Tag component values cannot be set for [DB-tag link setting] in [Select] of
[Communication action].
• [Communication action] - [MultiSelect] cannot be selected.
• Up to 4096 words can be used for the total data length of tag components in
one job. (The current data length is displayed on the status bar of [Job
setting].)
Point
The total data length of tag components in one job is the total data length of tag
components set in [Communication action] and [Operation action]. In
[Communication action], tag components are set in [Select/Update conditions]
and [DB-tag link setting].
All tags in one job are treated as different tags even if there are the same tags.
(4) Startup logging
(a) Set whether to output the startup history of the job to the log or not.
If this function is enabled, the job startup timing can be checked during system
start-up or tune-up.
When the [Startup logging] box is checked, the startup history of the job (date and
time, job name, trigger conditions) is saved on a CF card.
The startup log can be confirmed in [Job Execute Log] on the [Working log] tab.
Section 6.11.2 Job Execute Log
(b) When the log capacity becomes full (Log capacity: 1MB
The first half of the data are deleted.
The latest log is stored after the remaining data.
2)
(c) When this function is enabled, a processing time is required for saving or deleting
the startup history of the job.
It is recommended to disable this function during system operation.
6 - 24
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.1 Setting items in Job settings
1
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(a) Set whether to operate the job in test mode or not.
Up to 4 jobs can be set to [Test mode].
When the [Test mode] box is checked, the test mode is activated, and execution
details of the job can be confirmed before operation.
Job execution can be confirmed in [Job Execute Log] on the [Working log] tab.
OVERVIEW
(5) Test mode
(b) When [Test mode] is selected
The following are performed in the test mode.
Operations other than the following are identical to the actual operations.
• Startup data are logged.
• Detailed data are logged.
• Data are not written to GOT devices.
• No data are written to the database.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.1 Setting items in Job settings
6 - 25
6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
Configure the settings for startup conditions of the job.
The job is activated when the trigger condition value is changed from false to true.
At the time of power-up, at restart of the MES interface function, or at the end of one-shot
execution, all the conditions are initialized to false, and the job is started up when the initial
condition is true.
Item
6 - 26
Description
Combination
Selects conjunction of Trigger 1 and 2.
Trigger 1
Selects Trigger 1.
Trigger 2
Selects Trigger 2.
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
1
(b) The following shows the timings at which the combination result of [Trigger 1] and
[Trigger 2] is changed from false to true.
(In any other cases, because the combination result is not changed from false to
true, the job is not activated.)
Combination
Trigger 1
Trigger 2
False
SPECIFICATIONS
True
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
False
(Changed from false to (Changed from false to
true)
true)
OR (When either of them is
true, the result is true.)
True
False
True
False
(Remained false)
3
Combination result
(Changed from false to (Remained false)
true)
True
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(a) Selects a combination of [Trigger 1] and [Trigger 2].
• OR (When either of them is true, the result is true.)
• AND (When both of them are true, the result is true.)
When the combination result of [Trigger 1] and [Trigger 2] is changed from false to
true, the job is activated.
OVERVIEW
(1) Combination
5
(Changed from false to
True
True
False
False
(Changed from false
to true)
(Changed from false to (Remained true)
true)
6
True
True
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
False
False
True
False
(Changed from false to (Changed from false to
true)
true)
7
AND (When both of them
True
True
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
are true, the result is true.)
False
False
(Remained true)
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
true)
(Changed from false to
true)
8
True
False
TROUBLESHOOTING
True
False
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
6 - 27
(2) Trigger 1, Trigger 2
Select items for [Trigger 1] and [Trigger 2], referring to this section (3) and subsequent
descriptions.
Item
Disable
Description
Trigger 1 Trigger 2
No trigger conditions
This section (3) Disable
When the specified date, time and day of the
week match the actual date, time and day of
Time specification startup
the week, the condition changes from false to
true, resulting in job startup.
This section (4) Time specification
startup
The condition is alternated between true and
false in the specified cycles (unit: seconds),
Specified time period
and when it changes from false to true, the job
startup
is activated.
This section (5) Specified time period
startup
The actual tag component value is compared
with the condition value (tag component value
Value monitoring startup
or constant value) at every sampling times,
and the job is activated when the condition
changes from false to true.
This section (6) Value monitoring startup
The job is activated only once when the GOT
GOT Initializing
is started up.
This section (7) GOT Initializing
The job is activated when [Handshake startup]
of the GOT turns ON.
Handshake operation
Upon completion of the job execution,
[Completion notification] of the GOT turns ON.
This section (8) Handshake operation
: Selectable,
(3) Disable
(a) When [Disable] is selected for [Trigger 1] or [Trigger 2]
Another trigger is regarded as a trigger condition.
(b) When [Disable] is selected for both [Trigger 1] and [Trigger 2]
The job is not activated by trigger conditions.
The job can be executed only by one-shot execution.
6 - 28
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
: Not selectable
1
(b) When [Time specification startup] is selected, the date, time, and day of the week
must be set.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(a) When the specified date, time and day of the week match the actual date, time
and day of the week, the condition changes from false to true, resulting in job
startup.
OVERVIEW
(4) Time specification startup
Description
0000 to 9999
Month
1 to 12
Day
1 to 31
Hour
0 to 23
Minute
0 to 59
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Item
Year (4 digits)
SPECIFICATIONS
3
1) Year, Month, Day, Hour, and Minute
Directly enter the date and time.
Matching with the actual date and time is not checked for any field that remains
blank.
2) Day:
Specify a day of the week.
Check the checkbox of the day to be specified.
If no box is checked, it means "every day".
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
(Example) The following shows that the job is to be activated at 17:30 on
Monday through Friday.
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
(Example) The following shows that the job is to be activated at 9:00 on the 1st
day of every month.
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
If [Startup logging] is selected, each job startup can be confirmed with the time to
the second in the startup log.
The startup log can be checked on the [Working log] tab.
Section 6.11 Working Log
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
6 - 29
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Point
(5) Specified time period startup
(a) The condition is alternated between true and false in the specified cycles (unit:
seconds), and when it changes from false to true, the job is activated.
(b) When [Specified time period startup] is selected, set the cycle.
(Range: 1 to 32767 seconds)
(Example)
The following shows that the job is activated at 60-second intervals for an hour
from 12:00 to 13:00 every day.
(6) Value monitoring startup
(a) The actual tag component value is compared with the condition value (tag
component value or constant value) at every sampling times, and the job is
activated when the condition changes from false to true.
Even if the trigger condition becomes true temporarily between samplings, the job
is not activated unless it is true at time of sampling.
Startup point
Startup point
Condition value
Not activated here.
Tag compon
Sampling interval
6 - 30
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
1
OVERVIEW
(b) When [Value monitoring startup] is selected, specify conditions for comparison.
2) Condition
Select a condition for comparison.
Item
=
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
1) Tag, Component
Select a tag component to be compared with.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
3
Description
The tag component value is equal to the condition value.
(Not selectable when [Data type] of the tag component is [bit] or
[String])
The tag component value is greater than the condition value.
(Not selectable when [Data type] of the tag component is [bit] or
[String])
The tag component value is smaller than the condition value.
(Not selectable when [Data type] of the tag component is [bit] or
[String])
The tag component value is equal to or smaller than the condition
value.
(Not selectable when [Data type] of the tag component is [bit] or
[String])
3) Tag/Type
Select a tag or constant that is used as a condition for comparison.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
5
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
4) Component
Select or enter a component/constant value that is used as a condition for
comparison.
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
value.
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
The tag component value is equal to or greater than the condition
SPECIFICATIONS
The tag component value is not equal to the condition value.
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
6 - 31
(Example)
The following shows that the job is activated when the value of the tag
component (Process 1, Temperature) reaches 45 or higher.
(Example)
To activate the job repeatedly while the condition of [Value monitoring startup]
is met,
Make settings as follows:
Item
Description
Combination
AND (When both of them are true, the result is true.)
Trigger 1, Trigger 2
[Value monitoring startup], [Specified time period startup]
As the condition alternates between true and false as shown below, job startup
can be repeated while the [Value monitoring startup] condition is met.
[Trigger 1]
Tag component value
Timing of [Value monitoring startup]
Condition value
True
Sampling interval
False
[Trigger 2]
Timing of [Specified time period startup]
True
False
Fixed cycle
Combined by AND
Timing when AND is used
Startup point
True
False
6 - 32
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
1
(7) GOT Initializing
OVERVIEW
The job is activated only once when the GOT is started up.
(a) The job is activated when [Handshake startup] of the GOT turns ON.
Upon completion of the job execution, [Completion notification] of the GOT turns
ON.
[Handshake operation] is a startup method by which completion of job execution
can be notified to a GOT.
3
Sampling interval
GOT
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(8) Handshake operation
SPECIFICATIONS
Handshake operation started
ON
[Handshake startup]
OFF
ON
OFF
Handshake operation completed
Device data
1
When [Handshake startup] turns ON in the sequence program, the GOT collects
tag component values used for the job and executes the job.
2
Upon completion of the job execution, [Completion notification] of the GOT is
turned ON.*1
3
After confirming that [Completion notification] is ON, turn OFF [Handshake
startup] of the GOT.
4
When [Handshake startup] turns OFF, the GOT turns OFF [Completion
notification], causing the handshake operation to be completed.
5
After confirming the completion of the handshake operation, the next job is
executed.
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Data
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
Job operation
If an error occurs during job execution, [Completion notification] does not turn ON.
To detect such an error, enable [Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution].
Section 6.7.5 Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
*1
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
[Completion notification]
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
6 - 33
(b) [Handshake operation] is selectable only in [Trigger 1].
When [Handshake operation] is selected, selection is not allowed for [Trigger 2].
For selection of [Handshake operation], set the following items.
Item
Description
Select a tag component used to request for job startup.
Handshake startup
(Selectable only when [Data type] of the tag component is [bit])
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be
selected.
Select a tag component that allows notification of execution
completion of the job.
Completion notification *1
(Selectable only when [Data type] of the tag component is [bit])
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be
selected.
*1
6 - 34
Do not specify the same [Completion notification] to multiple jobs.
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
1
6.7.3 Setting items in Program execution
OVERVIEW
Configure the settings for the program execution function.
For the program execution function, refer to the following:
Section 5.1.9 Program execution function
• Before actions:
Set a program to be performed before execution of the first action of the job.
• After actions:
Set a program to be performed after execution of the last action of the job.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
1 Click the Setting button of [Before actions] or [After actions].
2 [Program execution setting (before action)] or [Program execution setting (after
action)] is displayed.
After completing the setting, click the
OK
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
button.
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.3 Setting items in Program execution
6 - 35
Item
Description
Execute program before
Set whether or not to enable program execution before or after execution
(after) action
of actions.
Program execution
destination
Command line
Select an application server to be accessed.
Enter a command line for the program that is executed on the application
server computer. (Up to 127 characters)
Check return value
Set whether to check the return value or not.
Wait for execution
Set whether or not to wait for execution completion of the program before
completion
executing the next processing.
(1) Execute program before action, or Execute program after action
(a) Set whether or not to enable program execution before or after execution of
actions.
(b) When [Execute program before action] or [Execute program after action] is
enabled, make the setting described in this section (2) and subsequent sections.
(2) Program execution destination
Select an application server to be accessed.
(3) Command line (Up to 127 characters)
Enter a command line for the program that is executed on the application server
computer.*1*2
For characters that can be used for command lines, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.1 ASCII code table
*1
*2
6 - 36
Programs that need to be run with administrator privileges (by a user in Administrators group) are
not executable.
To execute a program including any displays, place the application server computer into the logon
status.
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.3 Setting items in Program execution
1
(b) When [Check return value] is selected, set the following items.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(a) Set whether to check the return value or not.
When the [Check return value] box is checked, the return value (End code) of the
executed program is checked.
If no return value is returned within the [DB access timeout] time set in DB
Connection Service Setting Tool, a timeout error is detected and the job execution
is canceled.
For [DB access timeout], refer to the following:
Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool
OVERVIEW
(4) Check return value
(5) Wait for execution completion
If the [Wait for execution completion] box is checked, the next processing is executed
after completion of the program execution.
When [Check return value] is selected, [Wait for execution completion] is always
selected.
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
3) Do not execute job when the value is faulty. ([Program execution setting
(before action)] only)
When the [Do not execute job when the value is faulty] box is checked, if the
return value is faulty, the job execution is canceled.
4
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
2) Write the value into the tag when the value is faulty.
When the [Write the value into the tag when the value is faulty] box is checked,
if the return value is not normal, a value is assigned to the specified tag
component.
Set a tag component to which a value is assigned when this is selected.
• Tag, Component
Select a tag component to which a value is assigned.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
• Substitute value
Directly enter a substitute value.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
1) Normal return value (Default: 0)
Set a normal return value.
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.3 Setting items in Program execution
6 - 37
6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering
Set whether to utilize the DB buffering function or not.
For the DB buffering function, refer to the following:
Section 5.1.10 DB buffering function
Item
Enable DB buffering
Description
Set whether to enable the DB buffering or not.
Set whether or not to automatically resend data after recovery.
Automatically resend at
time of restoration
When the [Automatically resend at time of restoration] box is checked,
resend processing is automatically performed after recovery.
When the [Automatically resend at time of restoration] box is not checked,
resend processing is manually performed after recovery.
Point
Before resending data, the GOT communicates with the database.
At this time, if an action for communicating with the same database is set for a job,
a long time is required for execution of the job.
In the case of a large buffering size, it is advisable to resend the data manually
while any job that is set to communicate with the database is not in execution, so
that no problem will arise even if the MES interface function processing is
affected.
6 - 38
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering
1
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Set whether to enable or disable notification of errors (job cancellation) that occur during
job execution.
Job execution is canceled when access to the database fails or when type mismatch is
found.
Section 5.2 SNTP Time Synchronization Function
Section 6.12 Precautions
OVERVIEW
6.7.5 Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution
3
(b) When [Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution] has been
selected, set a tag component to which a value is assigned.
1) Tag, Component
Select a tag component to which a value is assigned.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
2) Substitute value
Directly enter a substitute value.
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
(a) Set whether to enable or disable notification of errors (job cancellation) that occur
during job execution.
When [Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution] box is
checked, if job execution is canceled, a value is assigned to the specified tag
component.
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.5 Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution
6 - 39
6.7.6 One-shot execution
Execute a job as a one-shot task.
Doing so allows the user to check the execution result of the currently editing [Job setting].
(1) Procedure for one-shot execution
Point
• In [One-shot execution], settings of [Startup logging] and [DB Buffering]
are not executed.
• All of job operations running with the MES interface function are
temporarily disabled during one-shot execution.
1 Click the One-shot execution button with the [Job settings] edit screen displayed.
2 Clicking the One-shot execution button performs one-shot job execution ignoring the
trigger conditions.
3 Check the execution result shown in the [View details] dialog box, which is displayed
after the execution.
For the display of the [View details] dialog box, refer to the following:
Section 6.11.2 (3) Updating the Job Execute Log
Remark
A dialog box indicating the current processing status is displayed until completion
of one-shot execution.
6 - 40
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.6 One-shot execution
1
(c) Precautions after one-shot execution
One-shot execution results are not reflected in [Connection result of previous job
execution].
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
3
SPECIFICATIONS
(b) Precautions during one-shot execution
Do not perform the following during one-shot execution.
• Do not disconnect the cable that is connected to the GOT during one-shot
execution.
Doing so will cause the MES interface function to be inoperative.
• Do not remove the CF card from the GOT during one-shot execution.
Doing so will cause the MES interface function to be inoperative.
If the MES interface function becomes inoperative, check the status and restart
the operation on the Diagnosis tab.
For restart of the MES interface function, refer to the following:
Section 6.10.2 Manipulating the MES Interface Function status (Operation)
2
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
(a) Precautions before one-shot execution
One-shot execution can be performed only when the MES interface function is
active.
When the MES interface function is not active, check the status and restart the
operation before starting one-shot execution.
For restart of the MES interface function, refer to the following:
Section 6.10.2 Manipulating the MES Interface Function status (Operation)
OVERVIEW
(2) Precautions for one-shot execution
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.7 Job Settings
6.7.6 One-shot execution
6 - 41
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
The following shows types of actions.
Up to 10 actions can be set for one job.
• [Communication action]
For communicating the GOT with a database
• [Operation action]
For operating tag component values
• [Transmit resource action]
For sending the resource data to the database
(Adding an action)
• Select [Communication action], [Operation action], or [Transmit resource action]
from the list box next to the Add button, and click the Add button.
• The Communication action dialog box, the Operation action dialog box, or the
Transmit resource action dialog box is displayed.
• Section 6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
• Section 6.8.2 Setting items in Operation action
• Section 6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
(Modifying an action)
• Select an action to be modified in [Action list], and click the Edit button.
• The Communication action dialog box, the Operation action dialog box, or the
Transmit resource action dialog box is displayed.
• Section 6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
• Section 6.8.2 Setting items in Operation action
• Section 6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
(Deleting an action)
• Select an action to be deleted in [Action list], and click the Delete button.
(Copying an action)
• Select an action to be copied in [Action list], choose [Replicate the selected action]
from the list box next to the Add button, and click the Add button.
6 - 42
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
1
1 Select [Replicate actions of other jobs] in the list box next to the Add button, and
click the Add button.
2 The [Replicate actions] dialog box is displayed.
OVERVIEW
(Copying an action of another job within the project)
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
5 Actions of the job selected in 4 are listed in [Source Actions]. Select an action to
be copied. (Multiple selection is available.)
6 Clicking the > button displays the action(s) selected in 5 in [Selected Actions to
replicate].
Item
>> button
< button
<< button
to replicate].
Puts all of the actions in [Source Actions] into [Selected Actions to
6
7
replicate].
Deletes the action(s) selected in [Selected Actions to replicate] from
the box.
Deletes all of the actions in [Selected Actions to replicate] from the
box.
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
> button
Description
Puts the action(s) selected in [Source Actions] into [Selected Actions
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
4 From [Source Jobs], select a job that includes a desired action.
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
3 By repeating the following steps 4 to 6 , set copy targets in [Selected Actions to
replicate].
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
7 Clicking the Run button executes copying.
8 Copied actions are located after existing actions.
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6 - 43
Item
Description
Type
The types of the existing actions are displayed.
Summary
Details of the existing actions are displayed.
Selecting an action in [Action list] and clicking the
button reverses the
order between the selected one and the one immediately above it.
button
The
button cannot be clicked on the first action.
Selecting an action in [Action list] and clicking the
button reverses the
order between the selected one and the one immediately below it.
button
The
button cannot be clicked on the last action.
Point
When more than one action are set, they are executed in order, starting from the
top.
(1) Type
The types of the existing actions are displayed.
Item
6 - 44
Description
Select
[Select] of [Communication action]
Update
[Update] of [Communication action]
Insert
[Insert] of [Communication action]
MultiSelect
[MultiSelect] of [Communication action]
Operation
[Operation action]
Resource
[Transmit resource action]
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
1
(2) Summary
OVERVIEW
Details of the existing actions are displayed.
(a) In the case of [Communication action]
Item
2
Description
• Select: {DB-tag link setting} = {Field name -> Tag component/Constant value}
• Update/Insert: {DB-tag link setting} = {Field name <- Tag component/Constant value}
(b) In the case of [Operation action]
Item
3
Description
{Operation action No.1}...{Operation action No.n}
• With substitution setting:
{Operation action} =
Display format*1 *2
{Substitution tag component/Constant value <- Operation tag component/Constant value Operator
4
Operation tag component/Constant value}
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
• Without substitution setting:
{Operation action} =
{Substitution tag component/Constant value <- Operation tag component/Constant value}
(c) In the case of [Transmit resource action]
Item
Description
[Database: Table name]{Comment storing field name, Time storing field name, Field name No.1, ..., Field
5
Display format of the tag component/constant value
Numerical value
Numerical value
String
"Character string"
6
GOT time: Date [GOT time]
Date
*2
Description
Device tag name, component name
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Item
Tag component
Server time: Date [Server time]
Date String
"Date [Date String]"
Variable
(Variable name)
Display format of the operator
Item
7
Description
+ (Addition)
+
- (Subtraction)
-
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
*1
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
name No.n}
(Multiplication)
(Division)
% (Remainder)
%
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Display format
SPECIFICATIONS
Display format*1
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
[Database: Table name]{DB-tag link setting No.1}...{DB-tag link setting No.n}
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6 - 45
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
Configure the settings for communications with a database.
1 Performing the operation for adding or modifying an action displays the
[Communication action] dialog box.
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.
Clicking the OK button after setting adds or modifies the action.
For the operation for adding or modifying an action, refer to the following:
Section 6.8 Job Settings - Actions
Item
Action type
Description
Select an action type.
Database
Select a database to be accessed.
Table name
Set a table name of the database to be accessed.
DB-tag link settings*1
Select/Update conditions*1
Select sort settings*1
Set assignments between field values and tag component values (or
constant values).
When [Select], [Update] or [MultiSelect] is selected for [Action type], set
conditions for the records to be selected or updated.
When [Select] or [MultiSelect] is selected for [Action type], set a
condition for sorting selected records.
Set the processing to be performed in the following cases:
No corresponding record exists when [Select], [Update], or [MultiSelect]
is selected for [Action type].
Exception process setting
button
Multiple corresponding records exist when [Select] or [Update] is
selected for [Action type].
The number of records to be multi-selected is greater than the number of
arrays set in [Array setting] of the tag when [MultiSelect] is selected for
[Action type].
Multi select setting
button
When [MultiSelect] is selected, detailed settings can be configured by
clicking this.
(To the next page)
6 - 46
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
1
(From the previous page)
job
button cannot be clicked on the first row.
Selecting a row and clicking the
button reverses the order between
the selected row and the one immediately below it.
The
Delete row button
button reverses the order between
the selected row and the one immediately above it.
The
button
2
Displays the total data length of the tag components in the job.
Selecting a row and clicking the
button
OVERVIEW
Tag component data length in
[Communication action].
Displays the total number of fields in the project.
3
button cannot be clicked on the last row.
Selecting a row and clicking the Delete row button deletes the row.
• All of the tags set in [Device tag settings] are inserted into [Tag] and
[Component].
• Select a row into which data are inserted and choose a tag in a list box
Insert a whole tag button
next to the Insert a whole tag button. Clicking the
Insert a whole tag button inserts all of the tag components into
contiguous rows starting from the selected one.
• The existing data set in the rows starting from the selected one are
moved down.
*1
Up to 8192 fields can be set in [DB-tag link settings], [Select/Update conditions] and [Select sort
settings] for each project.
(Check [No. of fields in project] in the lower left of the Communication action dialog box.)
SPECIFICATIONS
No. of fields in project
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Generated SQL text
Description
Displays SQL text that is generated in the currently editing
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Item
(1) Entry of [Component]
When data are entered in [Component] by [Insert a whole tag] or with the
[Field name] space blank, the data are copied to the [Field name] space.
(Characters not allowed for [Field name] are not entered.)
Because of this, setting the same name to each of the field name and tag
component name is useful.
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Remark
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 47
(1) Action type
Select an action type.
Item
Select *1
Update *1 *2
Insert
MultiSelect*1
*1
*2
Description
[Select] substitutes a field value of the record, whose conditions are
met, for a substitute value (tag component value/variable).
[Update] substitutes a substitute value (tag component value/
variable) for a field value of the record whose conditions are met.
Generates a new value, and inserts an insert value (tag component
value/constant value/variable) into a field of the generated record.
Substitutes field values of the records, whose conditions are met, for
substitute values (tag component values).
Cannot be selected when the database is Wonderware Historian.
With Access 2000 or Access 2003, the following restrictions exist.
• Up to 127 fields can be updated for a communication action.
• Do not access the same file with multiple GOTs and MES interface modules simultaneously.
(2) Database
Select a database to be accessed.
(3) Table name (1 to 32 characters)
Set a table name of the database to be accessed.
For characters that can be used for table names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.
(4) DB-tag link settings
Set assignments between field values and tag component values (or constant
values).
Up to 256 rows can be set in [DB-tag link settings] for each communication action.
6 - 48
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
1
2) Tag
Select a tag or variable for which a value is substituted.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
3
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
3) Component
Select or directly enter a component value or a variable of the substitution
target.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
1) Field name (1 to 32 characters)
Set a field name for the field value to be selected.
For characters that can be used for field names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
[Select] substitutes a field value of the record, whose conditions are met, for a
substitute value (tag component value/variable).
Set conditions of the record to be selected in [Select/Update conditions].
This section (5) Select/Update conditions
Conditions for sorting the selected records are set in [Select sort settings].
This section (6) Select sort settings
OVERVIEW
(a) When [Select] is selected for [Action type]
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
Database: DB1, Table name: RecipeData
Work_No
RECIPE1
RECIPE2
536
5
32
7
1
Selected
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Selected
Matched
RECIPE3
Selected
Tag component
Process1.RECIPE1
Process1.RECIPE2
Process1.RECIPE3
536
5
32
1
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Process1.Work_No
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 49
(b) When [Update] is selected for [Action type]
[Update] substitutes a substitute value (tag component value/variable) for a field
value of the record whose conditions are met.
Set conditions of the record to be updated in [Select/Update conditions].
This section (5) Select/Update conditions
1) Field name (1 to 32 characters)
Set a field name for the field value to be updated.
For characters that can be used for field names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.
2) Tag
Select a tag, constant, or variable which is substituted.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
3) Component
Select or directly enter a Component value or a variable that is to be
substituted.
Database: DB1, Table name: CompletionReport
Work_No
Completed
Rejected
:
:
:
536
496
32
Updated
Matched
Date
:
2005.07.01 15:12:00
Updated
Updated
Tag component
Process1.Work_No Process1.Complete
536
6 - 50
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
496
Process1.Rejected Constant: Server time
32
2005.07.01 15:12:00
1
1) Field name (1 to 32 characters)
Set a field name for the field value to be inserted.
For characters that can be used for field names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.
2) Tag
Select a tag, constant, or variable which is substituted.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
[Insert] generates a new record, and inserts an insert value (tag component value/
constant value/variable) into a field of the generated record.
OVERVIEW
(c) When [Insert] is selected for [Action type]
3
SPECIFICATIONS
3) Component
Select or directly enter a Component value or a variable that is to be
substituted.
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
Database: DB1, Table name: ERRORLOG
Date
Process No
Work_No
Parameter
2005.07.01 15:12:00
1
536
8
7
Inserted
Inserted
Inserted
Tag component
Constant: GOT time
Constant: 1
2005.07.01 15:12:00
1
Process1.Work_No. Process1.Parameter
536
8
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Inserted
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 51
4) When the database is Wonderware Historian, the following is inserted as
one record to the database by executing [Communication action].
• Date and time when a communication action is executed
• Tag name set for [Field name]
• Tag component value or constant value set for [Component]
When multiple fields are set, the number of records to be inserted is equivalent
to that of fields.
Database: InSQL Table name: History (fixed)
Datatime
Field name
6 - 52
Tag component
TagName
Value
Inserted
AnalogTag1
Equipment1Analog1
2006-10-20 15:30:00
AnalogTag1
10
AnalogTag2
Equipment1Analog2
2006-10-20 15:30:00
AnalogTag2
20
AnalogTag3
Equipment1Analog3
2006-10-20 15:30:00
AnalogTag3
30
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
1
1) Field name (Up to 32 characters)
Set a field name for the field values to be multi-selected.
For characters that can be used for field names, refer to the following.
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.
3
SPECIFICATIONS
2) Tag
Select a target tag.
Only the tags with [Array setting] can be selected.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
[MultiSelect] substitutes field values of the records, whose conditions are met, for
substitute values (tag component values).
Conditions for the redords to be selected are set in [Select/Update conditions].
This section (5) Select/Update conditions
Conditions for sorting the selected records are set in [Select sort settings].
This section (6) Select sort settings
OVERVIEW
(d) When [MultiSelect] is selected for [Action type]
3) Component
Select a target component.
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
When [MultiSelect] is used in a job, the total of [Tag component data length in job]
must be 45000 words or less.
[Tag component data length in job] represents a total length of the tag component
data set for the following:
• [DB-tag link settings] in [Communication action]
• [Select/Update conditions] in [Communication action]
• [Operation action]
Even if the same tag component is set more than once in the same job, each
setting is handled separately.
(The number of settings can be confirmed on the status bar of [Job setting], or in
the [Communication action] or [Operation action] dialog box.)
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
Point
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 53
Database: DB1, Table name: RECIPEDATA
RECIPE_A
:
:
:
536
5
32
1
537
6
33
0
538
7
34
1
539
8
35
0
540
9
36
1
Select-sorted
(Ascending)
RECIPE_B
RECIPE_C
Work_No
Selected
:
Matched
(RECIPE_C=1)
Selected
Tag component
Process1.Work_No[1]
Process1.RECIPE_A[1] Process1.RECIPE_B[1] Process1.RECIPE_C[1]
5
536
Process1.Work_No[2]
7
34
1
Process1.RECIPE_A[3] Process1.RECIPE_B[3] Process1.RECIPE_C[3]
540
6 - 54
1
Process1.RECIPE_A[2] Process1.RECIPE_B[2] Process1.RECIPE_C[2]
538
Process1.Work_No[3]
32
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
9
36
1
The data type of a tag component will change through operation processing of a
job.
Section 6.12 (3) Type mismatch
Data type of assignable field
Bit type
9i
SQL Server 2000/2005
Access 2000
MSDE 2000
Access 2003/2007
Yes/No type
bit
Double-precision type
NUMBER
tinyint
CHAR
float
VARCHAR
real
Integer type
Long integer type
Double type
Currency type
Text type*1 *2
text*1
Memo type*1 *2
float
NUMBER
real
point)
CHAR
char
Floating-point type *3
VARCHAR
varchar
Single type
Double type
Text type
text
char
VARCHAR
*1 *2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
6
Analog Tag(Real)
Memo type*1 *2
*1
Text type *2
varchar
Memo type *2
text*1
*1
Not available for [Select/Update conditions]
*2
*3
Memo-type fields in Rich Text Format cannot be used. (For Microsoft
Values are assigned with precision of six decimal digits.
String Tag
7
Access 2007)
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Character string
Analog Tag(Integer)
AutoNumber type
varchar
(Numeric type: Floating
4
5
Single type
char
CHAR
Discrete Tag
Byte type
smallint
Single-precision type
Historian
10g
int
(Numeric type: Integer)
Wonderware
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Oracle
Oracle
8i
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Oracle
component
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Data type of tag
3
SPECIFICATIONS
Point
2
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
(e) About tag components
Tag component values can be used as substitute/insert values for [Select],
[Update], [Insert] or [MultiSelect], or as condition values of [Select/Update
conditions].
The following table lists data types of tag components and those of assignable
fields.
If the data type of a tag component does not match the one of its substitution
target field, an error occurs, resulting in cancellation of job execution.
OVERVIEW
1
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 55
(f) About constants
Constants can be used as substitute/insert values for [Update] or [Insert], or as
condition values of [Select/Update conditions].
The following table lists constant types and the data types of assignable fields.
If the type of a constant does not match the data type of its substitution target
field, an error occurs, resulting in cancellation of job execution.
Data type of assignable field
Constant type
Values that can be entered in
Oracle
8i
SQL Server
Access 2000
[Component]
Oracle
9i
2000/2005
Access 2003/
MSDE 2000
2007
Oracle
521.98)
Byte type
int *1
• Signed decimal notation (Example: NUMBER
• Signed exponential notation (Example: -
smallint
Integer type
*1
tinyint *1
float
5.2198E03)
Historian
Yes/No type
bit *1
Up to 16 characters
[Number]
10g
Wonderware
real
Discrete Tag
Long integer type Analog
Single type
Tag(Integer)
Double type
Analog Tag(Real)
AutoNumber type
Currency type
Up to 32 characters
For characters that can be used for
[String]
character strings, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.3 Characters applicable to
CHAR
VARCHAR
char
varchar
text
*3
Text type *5
Memo type *5
String Tag
character string constants, etc.
• When using the date and time of the
database server:
[Date] *2
Select [Server time].
DATE
• When using the date and time of the GOT:
datetime
smalldatetime
Date/Time type
-*4
Select [GOT time].
Up to 32 characters
For characters that can be used for
character strings, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.3 Characters applicable to
character string constants, etc.
Specify the date and time of the GOT in the
following format.
[Date String]
Year (4 digits): YYYY
CHAR
Year (2 digits): YY
VARCHAR
Month (2 digits): MM
char
varchar
text*3
Text type *5
Memo type *5
String Tag
Day (2 digits): DD
Hour (2 digits): hh
Minute (2 digits): mm
Second (2 digits): ss
Example: "YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss"
"2005-07-01 15:12:00"
*1
*2
*3
6 - 56
Signed integer notation only
Clock precision:
When [GOT time] is selected: In units of seconds
When [Server time] is selected: Depends on the database server.
Not available for [Select/Update conditions]
*4
With Wonderware
*5
Memo-type fields in Rich Text Format cannot be used. (For Microsoft
Historian, only [GOT time] is assigned.
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
Access 2007)
(1) A variable is valid only in a single job execution and is not held.
(2) The initial variable value before substitution processing is the numerical value
of zero.
(3) The data type of a variable will change through operation processing of a job.
Section 6.12 (3) Type mismatch
SQL Server
Access 2000
9i
2000/2005
Access 2003/
MSDE 2000
2007
bit
int
smallint
(Numeric type: Integer)
Single-precision type
Double-precision type
Up to 16 characters.
NUMBER
tinyint
CHAR
float
VARCHAR
real
For characters that can be used for
char
variables, refer to the following:
vachar
text *1
Appendix 1.2 Characters
applicable to item names,
(Numeric type: Floating
point)
Floating-point type
component names, variable
names, etc.
*3
float
NUMBER
real
CHAR
char
VARCHAR
vachar
text *1
CHAR
Character string
VARCHAR
char
vachar
text *1
Yes/No type
Historian
Discrete Tag
Byte type
Integer type
5
Long integer type
Single type
Double type
Analog
AutoNumber type Tag(Integer)
Currency type
Text type *1*2
Memo type *1*2
6
Single type
Double type
Text type *1*2
Analog Tag(Real)
Memo type *1*2
Text type*2
Memo type*2
*1
Not available for [Select/Update conditions]
*2
*3
Memo-type fields in Rich Text Format cannot be used. (For Microsoft
Values are assigned with precision of six decimal digits.
String Tag
7
Access 2007)
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Bit type
10g
Wonderware
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
8i
Oracle
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Oracle
be entered in [Component]
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Values (variable names) that can
Oracle
3
4
Data type of assignable field
Data type of variable
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Point
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(g) About variables
Variables can be used as substitute/insert values for [Select], [Update] or [Insert],
or as condition values of [Select/Update conditions].
The following table lists data types of variables and those of assignable fields.
If the type of a variable does not match the data type of its substitution target field,
an error occurs, resulting in cancellation of job execution.
Up to 64 variables can be set for one job.
OVERVIEW
1
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 57
(5) Select/Update conditions
When [Select], [Update] or [MultiSelect] is selected for [Action type], set conditions for
the records to be selected, updated or multi-selected.
When a field value of a record matches a condition value, the record is selected or
updated.
Up to 8 rows can be set for one communication action in [Select/Update conditions].
Point
Exception processing is executed when records that meet [Select/Update
conditions] are in the following cases.
• Records to be selected/updated/multi-selected do not exist.
• Multiple records exist for select/update.
• The number of records to be multi-selected is greater than the number of
arrays set in [Array setting] of the tag.
For details of the exception processing, refer to the following.
This section (7) Exception processing setting
(a) Combine
Select a method by which conditions set in respective lines are combined.
Select "AND" or "OR".
If "AND" and "OR" are combined, the database will process "AND" first and then
"OR".
Item
AND
OR
Description
The condition of the line just above the corresponding line and the
condition of the corresponding line
The condition of the line just above the corresponding line or the
condition of the corresponding line
(b) Field name (1 to 32 characters)
Set a field name that is used for comparison.
For characters that can be used for field and table names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.
6 - 58
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
1
Item
OVERVIEW
(c) Condition
Select a condition for comparison.
Description
The field value is equal to the condition value.
2
The field value is not equal to the condition value.
The field value is greater than the condition value.
The field value is smaller than the condition value.
The field value is equal to or smaller than the condition value.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
The field value is equal to or greater than the condition value.
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
(e) Component
Select or directly enter a component/constant value that is used as a condition for
comparison.
If [Variable] is selected for [Tag], select or directly enter a variable.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
(d) Tag
Select a tag or constant that is used as a condition for comparison.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
Point
For tag components, constants or variables, refer to the following:
• This section (4)(e) About tag components
• This section (4)(f) About constants
• This section (4)(g) About variables
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 59
(6) Select sort settings
When [Select] or [MultiSelect] is selected in [Action type], set conditions for sorting the
records to be selected/multi-selected.
If multiple sort conditions are set, the database will process the conditions in order,
starting from the top.
In [Select sort settings], settings of up to eight lines are allowed for each
communication action.
(a) Field name (Up to 32 characters)
Set a field name for records to be selected.
For characters that can be used for field names and table names, refer to the
following.
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.
(b) Order
Set the order of sorting the selected records.
Item
Ascending order
Descending order
6 - 60
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
Description
Sorts the records so that the specified fields are arranged in
ascending order.
Sorts the records so that the specified fields are arranged in
descending order.
1
PRODUCT_CODE
DELIVERY_DATE
200
707
2007-01-31
201
662
2007-01-10
202
666
2007-01-29
203
662
2007-01-31
204
707
2007-01-10
205
666
2007-01-29
206
707
2007-01-10
207
662
2007-01-29
208
662
2007-01-31
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
ORDER_NO
OVERVIEW
Data base (before sorting)
3
SPECIFICATIONS
Sorting conditions in [Select sort settings]
1)
2)
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
Selected records [sorting results]
DELIVERY_DATE
206
707
2007-01-10
204
707
2007-01-10
201
662
2007-01-10
207
662
2007-01-29
205
666
2007-01-29
202
666
2007-01-29
208
662
1) 2007-01-31
203
662
2007-01-31
200
707
2007-01-31
2)
2)
2)
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
PRODUCT_CODE
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
ORDER_NO
1) First, selected records are sorted in ascending order of DELIVERY_DATE.
2) Then, records of the same DELIVERY_DATE are sorted in descending order of ORDER_NO.
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 61
(7) Exception processing setting
A click on the Exception process setting button displays the [Exception process
setting] dialog box.
(Example) When [Select] is selected for [Action type]
(a) Exception processing: No applicable record
When [Select], [Update] or [MultiSelect] is selected for [Action type], set
processing for the case where there is no record to be selected, updated or multiselected.
1) Send notification of this exception
When the [Send notification of this exception] box is checked, if there is no
record to be selected, updated or multi-selected, assign a value to the
specified tag component.
When [Send notification of this exception] is selected, set a tag component to
which the value is assigned.
• Tag, Component
Select a tag component to which a value is assigned.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
• Substitute value
Directly enter a substitute value.
2) Continue this job
After execution of exception processing described in the above 1), the system
continues executions of other actions.
3) Finish this job (Default: Finish this job)
After execution of exception processing described in the above 1), the job is
forcibly terminated without executing remaining actions.
At this time, substitute/insert values before exception processing execution are
committed, and they are written to relevant tag components.
6 - 62
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
1
3
SPECIFICATIONS
(b) Exception processing: Multiple applicable records
When [Select] or [Update] is selected for [Action type], set processing for the case
where there are multiple records to be selected or updated.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(1) When a job is forcibly terminated, an error occurred during job execution (job
cancellation) is not notified.
Section 6.7.5 Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job
execution
(2) If [Enable DB buffering] is selected for a job, its exception processing setting
is disabled.
Section 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering
OVERVIEW
Point
2) Send notification of this exception
When the [Send notification of this exception] box is checked, if multiple
records to be selected or updated exist, assign a value to the specified tag
component.
When [Send notification of this exception] is selected, set a tag component to
which the value is assigned.
• Tag, Component
Select a tag component to which a value is assigned.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
• Substitute value
Directly enter a substitute value.
3) Continue this job
After executions of exception processing described in the above 1) and 2), the
system continues executions of other actions.
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 63
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
When [Update] is selected for [Action type], if multiple records to be updated exist,
all of them are updated.
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Point
5
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
1) Select firster find records (Default: Checked)
When [Select] is selected for [Action type], checking the [Select firster find
records] box allows extraction of the head record from multiple applicable
records.
When this checkbox is not checked, the select/update processing is not
performed.
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
4) Finish this job (Default: Finish this job)
After execution of exception processing described in 1) and 2), the job is
forcibly terminated without executing remaining actions.
At this time, substitute/insert values before exception processing execution are
committed, and they are written to relevant tag components.
Point
(1) When a job is forcibly terminated, an error occurred during job execution (job
cancellation) is not notified.
Section 6.7.5 Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job
execution
(2) If [Enable DB buffering] is selected for a job, its exception processing setting
is disabled.
Section 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering
(c) Exception processing: Applicable records overflow
When [MultiSelect] is selected for [Action type], set processing for the case where
the number of records to be selected is greater than the number of arrays set in
[Array setting].
1) Select firster find records (Default: Checked)
When the [Select firster find records] checkbox is checked, if the number of
records selected by [Select/Update conditions] is greater than the number of
arrays set in [Array setting], records equivalent to the number of arrays are
actually selected.
When this checkbox is not checked, the select processing is not performed.
Remark
If the [Select firster find records] checkbox is not checked, the following is performed.
• When [Notify the number of acquired records] is set in [Multi select setting], 0 is
notified.
• When [Clear the unused tag components by zero] is set in [Multi select setting],
0 is assigned.
This section (8) Multi select setting
6 - 64
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
Point
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
4
5
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
(1) When a job is forcibly terminated, an error occurred during job execution (job
cancellation) is not notified.
Section 6.7.5 Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job
execution
(2) If [Enable DB buffering] is selected for a job, its exception processing setting
is disabled.
Section 6.7.4 Setting items in DB Buffering
SPECIFICATIONS
4) Finish this job (Default: Finish this job)
After executions of exception processing described in the above 1) and 2), the
system forcibly terminates the job without executing other actions.
At this time, substitute/insert values before execution of the exception
processing are committed to the database, and data written to tag component
are updated.
3
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
3) Continue this job
After executions of exception processing described in the above 1) and 2), the
system continues executions of other actions.
2
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
2) Send notification of this exception
If the [Send notification of this exception] checkbox is checked, a value is
assigned to the specified tag component when the number of records selected
by [Select/Update conditions] is greater than the number of arrays set in [Array
setting].
[Array setting] is less than the number of records selected by [Select/Update
conditions].
When selecting this, set a tag component to which a value is assigned.
• Tag, Component
Select a tag component to which a value is assigned.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
• Substitute value
Directly enter a substitute value.
OVERVIEW
1
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 65
(8) Multi select setting
A click on the Multi select setting button displays the [Multi select setting] dialog box.
Complete the setting, referring to the following explanation
(a) Specify the maximum number of acquiring records
If the [Specify the maximum number of acquiring records] checkbox is checked,
records of up to the specified number are acquired.
The GOT acquires the records in the order that the records are extracted from the
database.
When selecting this, set a tag for which a value is specified.
1) Tab/Type
Select a tag for which a value is specified.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
2) Component
Select or directly enter a component or a constant value to be specified.
Item
Values available for Component
[Number]
Within the range of 1 to 40000
Device tag
Single- or double-precision type tag component
Point
(1) When the select sort settings are set, the GOT acquires the records in the set
sorting orders.
(2) An error occurs if the specified tag component value is 0 or less.
Section 5.3 (2) When an error occurs in job execution
(b) Send notificcation of selected record number
When the [Notify the number of acquired records] checkbox is checked, the
number of actually acquired records is notified to the specified tag component.
When selecting this, set a tag component to which a value is notified.
• Tag
Select a tag component to which a value is notified.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
6 - 66
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
n=1
Component A
Component B
Component C
GB0
9
GD10 482
GD100 Table
n=2
GB1
4
GD12 623
GD105 Data1
n=3
GB2
7
GD14 769
GD110 Data2
n=5
n=4
GB3
1
GD16 154
GD115 Data3
Acquired records
GB4
GD18
GD120
n=6
0
0
""
GB5
GD20
GD125
0
0
""
"0" is assigned to
unassigned tag
components. ("Null" for
the character string
type)
(9) Generated SQL text
The SQL text generated by the currently editing [Communication action] is displayed.
It indicates the display format of the tag component/constant value.
Note that data of Tag component, Date, Date String, and Variable are generated at job
execution, and displayed in the format shown below. (It is different from the actual
SQL text.)
Actions of [Select] and [MultiSelect] generate SQL texts with SELECT. With the SQL
text, the user cannot identify which action is executed.
4
5
Description
Tag component
'(Device tag name, component name)'
Numerical value
'Number'
String
'String'
GOT time:
Oracle
3
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Item
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Data type
Bit
GB0
GD10 Double word
GD100 String (10 characters)
8i
TO_DATE('( Date and time [YYYYMMDDhhmmss])',
6
'YYYYMMDDHH24MISS')
Server time: sysdate
9i
TO_DATE('( Date and time [YYYYMMDDhhmmss])',
Oracle
10g
'YYYYMMDDHH24MISS')
Date
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
GOT time:
Oracle
Server time: CURRENT_TIMESTAMP
SQL Server
2000/2005
MSDE2000
Wonderware
7
GOT time: '( Date and time [YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss])'
Server time: CURRENT_TIMESTAMP
Access 2000
GOT time: '( Date and time [YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss])'
Access 2003/2007
Server time: NOW()
Date String
'(Date[String])'
Variable
'(Variable name)'
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Historian
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Component name Device
Component A
Component B
Component C
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(Example)
When the specified number of arrays of the tag component is "6" and the number
of actually acquired records is "4":
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
(c) Clear the unused tag components by zero
When the [Clear the unused tag components by zero] checkbox is checked, if the
specified number of arrays of the tag component is less than the number of
actually acquired records, zeros are assigned to other array areas.
OVERVIEW
1
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.1 Setting items in Communication action
6 - 67
6.8.2 Setting items in Operation action
Configure the settings for operation of tag component values.
Up to 20 dyadic operations can be set for one operation action.
1 Performing the operation for adding or modifying an action displays the [Operation
action] dialog box.
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.
Clicking the OK button after setting adds or modifies the action.
For the operation for adding or modifying an action, refer to the following:
Section 6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6 - 68
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.2 Setting items in Operation action
1
Item
Operation tag
Component
target.
Select a tag, constant, or variable which is computed.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
be computed.
[ ] (None), [+] (Addition), [-] (Subtraction), [
] (Multiplication), [
]
(Division), [%] (Remainder)
Selecting a row and clicking the
The
Delete row button
Tag component data length
in job
button reverses the order between the
selected row and the one immediately below it.
The
3
button cannot be clicked on the first row.
Selecting a row and clicking the
button
button reverses the order between the
selected row and the one immediately above it.
button cannot be clicked on the last row.
Selecting a row and clicking the Delete row button deletes the row.
Displays the total data length of the tag components in the job.
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
button
2
Select or directly enter a component/constant value or a variable that is to
Select an operator.
Operator
OVERVIEW
Select or directly enter a component value or a variable of the substitution
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Component
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
SPECIFICATIONS
Substitution tag
Description
Select a tag or variable to which a value is assigned.
Point
Operation actions are executed in order, from the top to the bottom.
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.2 Setting items in Operation action
6 - 69
(1) About constants
Constants can be used for [Operation tag] - [Component] and not for [Operator].
The following shows the constant types and values that can be entered in the
[Component] column.
Constant type
Values that can be entered in [Component]
Up to 16 characters
[Number]
• Signed decimal notation (Example: -521.98)
• Signed exponential notation (Example: -5.2198E03)
Up to 32 characters
For characters that can be used for character strings, refer to the following:
[String]
Appendix 1.3 Characters applicable to character string constants,
etc.
Up to 32 characters
For characters that can be used for character strings, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.3 Characters applicable to character string constants,
etc.
Specify the date and time of the GOT in the following format.
Year (4 digits): YYYY
[Date String]
Year (2 digits): YY
Month (2 digits): MM
Day (2 digits): DD
Hour (2 digits): hh
Minute (2 digits): mm
Second (2 digits): ss
Example: "YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss"
"2005-07-01 15:12:00"
(2) About variables
Variables can be used for [Component] of [Substitution tag] or [Component] of
[Operation tag].
By using a variable, a value computed in [Operation action] can be assigned to a
database, or to a tag component (In the latter case, operation is performed based on
a value extracted from the database).
The following table shows the variable types and values that can be entered in the
[Component] column.
Up to 64 variables can be set for one job.
Point
(1) A variable is valid only in a single job execution and is not held.
(2) The initial variable value before substitution processing is the numerical value
of zero.
(3) The data type of a variable will change through operation processing of a job.
Section 6.12 (3) Type mismatch
Variable type
Values (variable names) that can be entered in [Component]
Up to 16 characters
[Variable]
For characters that can be used for variables, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.2 Characters applicable to item names, component
names, variable names, etc.
6 - 70
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.2 Setting items in Operation action
1
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
The following is a case in which correction power is calculated using a correction
voltage and it is assigned to a tag component (Process 1.Correction power).
The tag component value (Process 1.Correction power) obtained from the following
[Operation action] is:
(Process 1.Voltage 100 + 50) Currrent
OVERVIEW
(3) Setting example of [Operation action]
SPECIFICATIONS
3
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.2 Setting items in Operation action
6 - 71
6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
Configure the settings for sending the resource data collected in a GOT to a database.
Point
Before setting [Transmit resource action], configure the settings to collect the
resource data (the logging setting, the advanced user alarm observation, the
advanced system alarm observation, and the operation log setting).
For details, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual
The settings for collecting the resource data must be matched to the settings for
the resource data send action. When the settings are not matched, an error may
occur at the job execution.
Item
Description
Action type
Select an action type.
Database
Select a database to be accessed.
Table name
Select a table name of the database to be accessed.
Resource type
Select a resource data type.
Field name setting*1
Set the assignments between the resource data to be sent and the field
value for the database.
Clicking this button checks that the settings for collecting the resource
data are matched to the settings for the resource data send action.
Confirm setting button
An error message is displayed when the settings are not matched.
For the displayed error message, refer to the following.
Section 6.12 Precautions
Logging ID/Alarm ID
Operation log file
Set the logging ID for the logging setting or the alarm ID that is set on the
advanced alarm observation.
Clicking the Set operation log file name button displays the stored
location for the operation log data to be sent.
(To the next page)
6 - 72
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
1
(From the previous page)
*1
[Transmit resource action].
2
Up to 8192 fields can be set in [Field name setting] for each project.
(Check [No. of fields in project] in the lower left of the Communication action dialog box.)
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(1) Action type
Select an action type.
The selectable action type is the insert only.
Item
Insert
Description
Generates a new record, and assigns a value (resource data) into a field.
Select a database to be accessed.
(3) Table name (1 to 32 characters)
4
Set a table name of the database to be accessed.
When the selected database is Wonderware Historian, the table name is fixed to
[History].
For characters that can be used for table names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.
(4) Resource type
5
Operation log
specified intervals.
Alarm data that are collected in specified intervals for the advanced user
alarm observation setting
Alarm data for controllers and a network that are collected by the
advanced system alarm observation setting
GOT operation history data collected by the operation log function
6
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Advanced system alarm
Description
Device values of a controller that are collected at any timing or in
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Advanced user alarm
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
(Default: Logging)
Select a resource data type.
Logging
3
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) Database
Item
OVERVIEW
Displays the SQL text that is generated during editing the data for
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Generated SQL text
Description
Specify the number of resource data to be sent for each action.
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Item
Range of data
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
6 - 73
(5) Field name setting
Set the assignments between the resource data to be sent and the field values for the
database.
The resource data types vary according to [Resource type].
(Example) Screen for settings of sending logging data
1)
2)
4)
5)
3)
6)
Item
Description
1)
*1
First row (comment)
A field name for sending a comment to the database can be set.
2)
Field name*3*5
Second row (time)*1
A field name that specifies a date and time for a resource data send
(0 to 32 characters)
action can be set.
3)
Third row or later (resource data)
A field name for sending the resource data to the database can be set.
Input the field name for [Insert data] to be sent.
4)
First row (0 to 32 characters, Default: Comment)*1*4
5)
Second row (Default: GOT time)
The comment to be inserted into the database can be set.
The date and time for inserting the data to the database can be
selected from [GOT time] or [Server time].
6)
Third row or later (resource data)
The list of resource data to be inserted to the database is displayed.
Insert data*2
This section (5)(a) When selecting [Logging] for [Resource type]
This section (5)(b) When selecting [Advanced user alarm] for
[Resource type]
This section (5)(c) When selecting [Advanced system alarm] for
[Resource type]
This section (5)(d) When selecting [Operation Log] for [Resource
type]
*1
*2
*3
When setting [Field name], fields for the stroring comment and the time data are created in the
database. (The setting for the field name is not necessarily required.)
When [Field name] is not inputted, no resource data is sent.
For the types of data to be sent in the fields, refer to the following.
*4
This section (5)(e) Data types
For characters that can be used for character strings, refer to the following:
*5
Appendix 1.3 Characters applicable to character string constants, etc.
For characters that can be used for field and table names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.
6 - 74
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
1
The following shows the resource data to be sent and the types of the data.
OVERVIEW
(a) When selecting [Logging] for [Resource type]
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
Data type
Logging time
Date
LoggingDevice (1 to 250)*1
Numeric type (Integer, floating point)
*1
The numbers of 1 to 250 correspond to the rows set for the number of the block number in the
logging setting.
(b) When selecting [Advanced user alarm] for [Resource type]
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Insert data
SPECIFICATIONS
3
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
Insert data
Data type
Alarm time
Date
Alarm status
Character string
Character string
comment*1
Character string
Middle comment
Detail comment*1
*1
Character string
The first column data of the column number set in the comment group is sent.
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Higher
7
Character string
*1
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
General comment*1
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
6 - 75
Point
Up to 512 of one-byte and two-byte characters can be set in a comment for the
advanced user alarm.
Set the length of character string on the database more than that for the comment.
(c) When selecting [Advanced system alarm] for [Resource type]
Insert data
Alarm time
Data type
Date
Alarm status
Character string
Comment
Character string
Point
Up to 512 of one-byte and two-byte characters can be set in a comment for the
advanced system alarm.
Set the length of character string on the database more than that for the comment.
6 - 76
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
1
OVERVIEW
(d) When selecting [Operation Log] for [Resource type]
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
Insert data*1
Data type
Log No.(NO)
Numeric type (Integer)
Screen No.(SCRN_NO)
Character string
Action type(ACT_ABBR)
Character string
Action type(ACTION)
Character string
Object name(OPNAME)
Character string
Operation level(OPERATOR)
Character string
Operation level(OPE_ID)
Numeric type (Integer)
User ID(USER_ID)
Numeric type (Integer)
Action No.(ACT_NO)
Numeric type (Integer)
Data type(DATA_TYPE)
Character string
Device name(DEV_NAME)
Character string
Change value(CHG_VALUE)
Character string
Previous value(PREV_VALUE)
Character string
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Date
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Logging time(DATE)
The data to be sent vary according to the operation log target.
For details of the collected data in the operation log, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version
Screen Design Manual
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
*1
SPECIFICATIONS
3
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
6 - 77
(e) Data types
The following table shows the data types of resource data and the data types of
data to be sent in the field.
When the data type of the resource data does not match that of data to be sent in
the field, an error occurs, resulting in the cancellation of the job execution.
Data type of data to be sent in field
Data type of resource
Oracle
8i
data
Oracle
9i
Oracle
Date
Character string
SQL Server 2000/2005
Access 2000
MSDE 2000
Access 2003/2007
smalldatetime
char
CHAR
VARCHAR
varchar
text
smallint
tinyint
CHAR
float
VARCHAR
real
Text type*1
Memo type*1
String Tag
String Tag*2
Byte type
int
NUMBER
Date/Time type
Yes/No type
bit
Numeric type
Historian
10g
datetime
DATE
Wonderware
char
varchar
text
Integer type
Long integer type
Discrete Tag
Single type
Analog Tag(Integer)
Double type
Analog Tag(Real)
AutoNumber type
String Tag
Currency type
Text type*1
Memo type*1
*1
Memo-type fields in Rich Text Format cannot be used. (For Microsoft
*2
With Wonderware
Access 2007)
Historian, only [GOT time] is sent.
(6) Logging ID/Alarm ID
When selecting [Logging] or [Advanced user alarm] for [Resource type], set the
logging ID of logging data or the alarm ID for advanced user alarm data.
6 - 78
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
1
(7) Operation log file
OVERVIEW
The GOT displays the operation log file when [Operation log] is selected for
[Resource type] only.
Point
When the operation log settings are changed after setting [Transmit resource
action], click the Set operation log file name button to set the operation log file
again.
The settings for [Operation log file] are not automatically changed.
When the displayed data on [Operation log file] does not exist, an error occurs at
the job execution.
3
SPECIFICATIONS
operation log file.
The GOT can send the displayed operation log file to the database.
Inputting the data directly to [Drive Name], [Folder Name], and [File Name] are not
available.
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Clicking the Set operation log file name button displays the stored location for the
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
(8) Range of data
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Specify the maximum number of resource data to be sent for one resource data send
action.
When [Operation Log] is selected for [Resource type], [Range of data] is fixed to
[Latest data (days specified)].
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
7
(No. specified)
Latest data
(time specified)*1
Specify the maximum number of resource data collected in the GOT after the
last action.
(Range:1 to 99999, Default:1)
Specify the time period from the job execution time to the specified time for
sending the collected resource data.
(Range:1 to 99999, Default:1 (seconds))
Specify the number of days including in the date at the job execution for sending
Latest data
the resource data. (This item cannot be specified for sending the logging data,
(days specified)*1
the advanced user alarm data, and the advanced system alarm data.)
All data
All the resource data collected in the GOT after the last action.
(Range:1 to 400, Default:1 (days))
For details of *1, refer to the following.
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
6 - 79
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Latest data
Description
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Item
*1
Resource data to be sent after changing the GOT time and date
When changing the GOT time, the resource data to be sent may differ from the resource data to be
sent without changing the GOT time.
The following shows the resource data to be sent after changing the GOT time and date.
(1) Logging data
(a) Executing the next action before the time of the last action
Example 1) Changing the time from 11:40 to 11:10, and executing the next action at 11:20
: Time specified (300 seconds)
GOT time
Sending resource data
(last action)
A
B
(11:25) 11:30
11:40
Sending resource data
(next action)
C
11:10
<Resource data to be sent for the last action>
A:Data collected for the specified time (300 seconds)
<Resource data to be sent for the next action>
B:Data collected after the last action until changing
the GOT time
C:Data collected for the specified time (300 seconds)
11:20
Changing GOT time
(b) Executing the next action after the time of the last action
Example 1) Changing the time from 11:40 to 11:20, and executing the next action at 11:35
: Time specified (300 seconds)
GOT time
Sending resource data
(last action)
A
B
<Resource data to be sent for the last action>
A:Data collected for the specified time (300 seconds)
D
(11:25) 11:30 (11:35) 11:40
C
Changing GOT time
11:20
Sending resource data
(next action)
11:35
<Resource data to be sent for the next action>
B,C:Data collected for the specified time (300
seconds)
D:Data collected after the time of the next action (in
the previous GOT time setting)
Example 2) Changing the time from 11:58 to 12:58, and executing the next action at 13:00
: Time specified (300 seconds)
GOT time
Sending resource data
(last action)
A
(11:25) 11:30
<Resource data to be sent for the last action>
A:Data collected for the specified time (300 seconds)
11:58
B
Changing GOT time
6 - 80
Sending resource data
(next action)
12:58 13:00
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
<Resource data to be sent for the next action>
B:Data collected for the specified time (300 seconds)
(2) Advanced user alarm data/advanced system alarm data
(a) Executing the next action before the time of the last action
(The GOT does not send all the data collected after the last acton.)
Example 1) Changing the time from 11:40 to 11:00, and executing the next action at 11:20
: Time specified (300 seconds)
GOT time
A
(11:25) 11:30
11:40
Sending resource data
(next action)
11:00
2
<Resource data to be sent for the last action>
A:Data collected for the specified time (300 seconds)
<Resource data to be sent for the next action>
No data
11:20
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Sending resource data
(last action)
OVERVIEW
1
3
(b) Executing the next action after the time of the last action
Example 1) Changing the time from 11:40 to 11:20, and executing the next action at 11:35
: Time specified (300 seconds)
GOT time
(11:25) 11:30 (11:35) 11:40
C*
Changing GOT time
11:20
Sending resource data
(next action)
11:35
<Resource data to be sent for the next action>
Data collected for the specified time (300 seconds)
B:Data collected before changing the GOT time
C:Data collected after changing the GOT time
* The data collected before the last action are not sent by the next action even though the data is
collected within the specified time.
(3) Operation log data
(a) Executing the next action before the time of the last action
(The GOT does not send all the data collected after the last acton.)
Example 1) Changing the time from 0:40 to 23:40 on the previous day, and executing the
next action at 23:50
: Days specified (1 day)
GOT time
Sending resource data
(last action)
Changing date
A
0:30
Sending resource data
(next action)
5
6
7
<Resource data to be sent for the last action>
A:Data collected for the specified day (1 day)
0:40
<Resource data to be sent for the next action>
No data
23:50
8
Changing GOT time
TROUBLESHOOTING
23:40
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
B
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
<Resource data to be sent for the last action>
A:Data collected for the specified time (300 seconds)
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
A
4
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Sending resource data
(last action)
SPECIFICATIONS
Changing GOT time
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
6 - 81
Example 2) Changing the time from 0:40 to 0:10 on the same day, and executing the next
action at 0:20
: Days specified (1 day)
GOT time
Sending resource data
(last action)
Changing date
A
0:30
0:40
Sending resource data
(next action)
0:10
<Resource data to be sent for the last action>
A:Data collected for the specified day (1 day)
<Resource data to be sent for the next action>
No data
0:20
Changing GOT time
(b) Executing the next action after the time of the last action
Example 1) Changing the time from 23:40 to 0:10 on the next day, and executing the next
action at 0:20
: Days specified (1 day)
GOT time
<Resource data to be sent for the last action>
A:Data collected for the specified day (1 day)
Sending resource data
(last action)
A
Changing date
23:30
23:40
Sending resource data
(next action)
B
Changing GOT time
0:10
0:20
<Resource data to be sent for the next action>
B:Data collected for the specified day (1 day) after
the last action
Example 2) Changing the time from 0:40 to 0:50 on the same day, and executing the next
action at 1:00
: Days specified (1 day)
GOT time
Sending resource data
(last action)
Changing date
A
<Resource data to be sent for the last action>
A:Data collected for the specified day (1 day)
B
0:30
0:40
Sending resource data
(next action)
C
Changing GOT time
6 - 82
0:50
1:00
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
<Resource data to be sent for the next action>
B, C:Data collected for the specified day (1 day)
after the last action
1
Logging*1*2
Advanced user alarm*3
Advanced system alarm
Operation log
1000
31
59
10000
582
(5)
(23)
(42)
(410)
2
5
8
88
2
5
8
-
1
5
9
82
The logging is collected by the buffer historical and the device points set to 250 points and a
100ms cycle for the logging setting.
When collecting data every 100ms cycle is canceled, the value is shown in the parentheses.
When sending the alarm comment with 512 one-byte characters.
When the numbers of insert fields are 7 to 13 by one action.
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
500
7
5
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
*2
*3
*4
*4
*3
100
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Number of resource data
Resource type
4
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
The time to complete the resource data send action (Reference value (seconds))
The following shows the resource data send time for the resource type, and the
number of resource data (100, 500, 1000, 10000).
Under the following conditions, the values for sending data differ from the reference values in the following table.
• Loads on the GOT or loads on between the GOT and the server computer or
others
• MES interface function setting
SPECIFICATIONS
3
Remark
*1
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(1) The GOT sends the resource data only one time, regardless of the settings
for [Range of data]. The GOT does not send the sent data to the database.
The GOT may send the sent data when restarting the GOT for downloading
the project data and others.
Section 6.12 Precautions
(2) When an action fails due to the communication error between the GOT and
the server computer or others, the GOT sends the failed action data at the
next action.
OVERVIEW
Point
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
6 - 83
(9) Generated SQL text
The SQL (INSERT) text generated by the currently editing data for [Transmit resource
action] is displayed.
The SQL text shows the display type for the resource data, the character string, and
the date.
The GOT does not send the resource data without setting the field name for [Field
name setting]. The data with no field name are not included in the SQL text.
The following table shows the display type for the generated resource data and the
date at the job execution. (The display type differs from the actual data at the job
execution.)
Item
Description
*1
Resource data
'Data name'
String
'String'
GOT time:
Oracle
TO_DATE('(Date and time[YYYYMMDDhhmmss])',
8i
'YYYYMMDDHH24MISS')
Server time: sysdate
GOT time:
Date
Oracle
9i
Oracle
10g
TO_DATE('(Date and time[YYYYMMDDhhmmss])',
'YYYYMMDDHH24MISS')
Server time: CURRENT_TIMESTAMP
SQL Server 2000/2005
MSDE 2000
Wonderware
*1
Historian
GOT time: '(Date and time[YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss])'
Server time: CURRENT_TIMESTAMP
Access 2000
GOT time: '(Date and time[YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss])'
Access 2003/2007
Server time: NOW()
For the data name, refer to the following.
This section (5) Field name setting
6 - 84
6.8 Job Settings - Actions
6.8.3 Setting items in Transmit resource action
1
Configure the SNTP time synchronization setting and the DB buffering function setting.
1 Click [Option setting] in the Edit items tree.
OVERVIEW
6.9 Option Setting
2
2 The "option setting" area is displayed on the detailed setting edit screen.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.9 Option Setting
6 - 85
6.9.1 Setting items in SNTP time synchronization setting
Configure the settings for the SNTP time synchronization function.
Time is obtained from the SNTP server computer on the network and used on the GOT.
Point
To synchronize the time between the GOT and other devices on the network,
using the time on the SNTP server computer is recommended.
(1) Synchronize using SNTP
(a) When the [Synchronize using SNTP] box is checked, the time is adjusted to the
time of the SNTP server computer on the network.
The timing is as follows:
• When powering ON the GOT from OFF
• When resetting the GOT
• Once for every interval specified in Sync. Interval
Point
When the GOT time is set to be synchronized with the clock time of another
controller by GT Designer2 and GOT utility, even if the [Synchronize using SNTP]
box is checked, the SNTP time synchronization is not performed.
To utilize the SNTP time synchronization, do not set the following:
• [Clock Setting] in [GOT setup] from [System Environment] (Selecting
[Adjust] or [Adjust/Broadcast].)
• [Clock Setting] from [System Environment] (Checking the [Clock data
GOT is matched to clock data External (Adjust)] box.)
Refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual
6 - 86
6.9 Option Setting
6.9.1 Setting items in SNTP time synchronization setting
1
Item
Description
SNTP server address
Enter the IP address of the SNTP server or NTP server in decimal
(required)
notation.
2
Japan Standard Time (GMT+09:00) is selected by default.
(2) When time information is not obtainable from the SNTP server computer
When the GOT cannot obtain time information from the SNTP server computer due to
failure of the network or time synchronization server, it behaves as follows:
(a) When time information is not obtained at the time of powering ON the GOT from
OFF, or resetting the GOT
1) Time synchronization is not performed. (Clock data of the GOT are used as
they are.)
2) An error is output to the MES interface Execute Log.
(b) When time information is not obtained once for each interval specified in Sync.
Interval
1) The GOT continues its operations based on the information that was
successfully obtained by time query.
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
3) Time query is executed to the SNTP server computer after the interval
specified for Sync. Interval.
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
2) If the previous time query was successful, an error is output to the MES
interface Execute Log.
Point
(1) When time query to the SNTP server computer is executed successfully, it
can be also confirmed by the error log.
• When succeeded in initial time query
An error code is output to the MES interface Execute Log.
• When failed in previous time query and succeeded this time
An error code is output to the MES interface Execute Log.
(2) The MES interface Execute Log can be checked on the [Working log] tab.
Section 6.11 Working Log
(3) Precautions on the time synchronization function
(a) Synchronizing time with SNTP server computer
When [Synchronize using SNTP] is selected, an SNTP server computer is
required.
Note that the SNTP server computer must have the time synchronization server
function.
6 - 87
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
3) Time query is executed to the SNTP server computer after the interval
specified for Sync. Interval.
6.9 Option Setting
6.9.1 Setting items in SNTP time synchronization setting
3
SPECIFICATIONS
Default is 1 minute.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Set an interval used for time synchronization.
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Sync. Interval (required)
Select a time zone used for time synchronization.
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Time zone (required)
OVERVIEW
(b) When [Synchronize using SNTP] is selected, set the following items.
6.9.2 Setting items in DB buffering settings
Configure the settings for the DB buffering function.
For the DB buffering function, refer to the following:
Section 5.1.10 DB buffering function
(1) DB buffering capacity (Range: 16MB to 512MB, Default: 64MB)
Set the capacity used for DB buffering out of the entire CF card capacity within the
following range.
Maximum capacity = CF card capacity - 32M bytes
(2) DB buffering status
(a) Select a tag component into whose device whether data are currently
accumulated in the DB buffer or not is stored.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
(b) Data are stored as follows depending on the data type.
Data type of tag
Description
component
Bit
String
Other than the above
6 - 88
6.9 Option Setting
6.9.2 Setting items in DB buffering settings
OFF : Not accumulated
ON : One or more data accumulated
“0”
: Not accumulated
“1”
: One or more data accumulated
0
: Not accumulated
1
: One or more data accumulated
1
(a) Select a tag component into whose device whether data are currently
accumulated in the DB buffer or not is stored.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
Data type of tag
Description
component
OFF : Not accumulated
Bit
ON : One or more data accumulated
“0”
String
: Not accumulated
3
1 or greater: Number of buffering data that are accumulated
0
Other than the above
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(b) Data are stored as follows depending on the data type.
OVERVIEW
(3) No. of DB bufferings
: Not accumulated
(a) Select a tag component used to request for resend processing of the DB buffer.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
(b) The following explains the operation of the resend processing using [Resend DB
buffer request].
Data type of tag
Description
component
The resend processing of the DB buffer is performed when the
specified tag component is ON.
Normal: Turns OFF after completion of the resend processing.*1*2
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
(4) Resend DB buffer request
SPECIFICATIONS
1 or greater: Number of buffering data that are accumulated
5
Outputs an error code to MES interface Execute Log, and turns OFF.
Bit
Resend DB buffer request
Tag component value
6
Execute resend
The resend processing of the DB buffer is performed when "1" is written
to the specified tag component.
String
Normal: "0" is written after completion of the resend processing.*1*2
Error:
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
DB buffer resend processing
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Error:
7
to the specified tag component.
Other than the above
Normal: "0" is written after completion of the resend processing.*1*2
Error:
Outputs an error to the MES interface Execute Log, and "0" is written.
*1
*2
Do not change the value of the specified tag component until the resend processing is completed.
Even if the value changes, the resend processing is not interrupted.
To make another DB buffer resend request after completion of resend processing, wait for a
sampling interval of the specified tag component or more, and then set the device as follows:
• Bit type: ON
• Character string type: "1"
• Other than the above: 1
6.9 Option Setting
6.9.2 Setting items in DB buffering settings
6 - 89
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
The resend processing of the DB buffer is performed when "1" is written
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Outputs an error to the MES interface Execute Log, and "0" is written.
(5) Clear DB buffer request
(a) Select a tag component used to request for clear processing of the DB buffer.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
(b) The following explains the operation of the clear processing using [Clear DB
buffer request].
Data type of tag
Description
component
The clear processing of the DB buffer is performed when the specified
tag component is ON.
Turns OFF after completion of the clear processing.*3*4
Clear DB buffer request
Tag component value
Bit
DB buffer clear
processing
Execute clear
The DB buffer is cleared when "1" is written to the specified tag
String
component.
"0" is written after completion of the clear processing.*3*4
Other than the above
(Including string)
*3
*4
6 - 90
The DB buffer is cleared when "1" is written to the specified tag
component.
"0" is written after completion of the clear processing.*3*4
Do not change the value of the specified tag component until the clear processing is completed.
Even if the value changes, the clear processing is not interrupted.
To make another DB buffer clear request after completion of clear processing, wait for a sampling
interval of the specified tag component or more, and then set the device as follows:
• Bit type: ON
• Character string type: "1"
• Other than the above: 1
6.9 Option Setting
6.9.2 Setting items in DB buffering settings
1
(a) Select a tag component into whose device the status of whether the DB buffer is
full or not is stored.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
Description
OFF : DB buffer is not full.
ON : DB buffer is full.
String
Other than the above
“0”
: DB buffer is not full.
“1”
: DB buffer is full.
0
: DB buffer is not full.
1
: DB buffer is full.
3
(c) When the DB buffer becomes full, buffering operation will be stopped.
After buffering operation is stopped, even if a job for which DB buffering is
enabled is activated, its SQL texts are discarded without being buffered.
Execution of a job for which DB buffering is enabled is not canceled.
Point
Check [DB buffer utilization] shown in this section (7) to prevent the "DB buffer
full" status.
5
(7) DB buffer utilization
(a) Select a tag component into whose device the utilization of the DB buffer area
(unit: %) is stored.
Tags that have a tag component with [Array setting] cannot be selected.
(b) Data are stored as follows depending on the data type.
Data type of tag
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
ON : One or more data accumulated
“0”
: Not accumulated
Other than "0": Utilization of DB buffer area (Unit: %)
0
: Not accumulated
7
Other than 0: Utilization of DB buffer area (Unit: %)
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Other than the above
OFF : Not accumulated
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
String
6
Description
component
Bit
4
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Bit
SPECIFICATIONS
component
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Data type of tag
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(b) Data are stored as follows depending on the data type.
OVERVIEW
(6) DB buffering full
6.9 Option Setting
6.9.2 Setting items in DB buffering settings
6 - 91
6.10 Diagnosis
Perform the remote diagnosis for the MES interface function.
1 Click the [Diagnosis] tab.
2 The [Diagnosis] sheet is displayed.
3 Operate it referring to the following descriptions.
6 - 92
6.10 Diagnosis
1
6.10.1 Checking the MES Interface Function status (Status)
Running
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Display
OVERVIEW
The operation status of the MES interface function can be checked.
The following explains the display of [Status].
The display of [Status] is updated every 3 seconds.
Description
The MES interface function is working normally.
The MES interface function is stopped.
Stopped
Even if trigger conditions are met, no job will be executed during stop of
3
Even if trigger conditions are met, no job will be executed during
initialization.
The MES interface function is starting up after processing of the above
Starting
Initializing status.
Even if trigger conditions are met, no job will be executed during startup.
Stopping
The MES interface function is being stopped.
The MES interface function setting screen is attempting to acquire the
Getting status
status from the MES interface function.
Connection failed
interface function and could not acquire the status.
The MES interface setting has not been done, or the MES interface
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
function is stopped due to an error.
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
The MES interface function setting screen failed to connect to the MES
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
The GOT is in process of powering from OFF to ON, or resetting.
Initializing
SPECIFICATIONS
the function.
6.10 Diagnosis
6.10.1 Checking the MES Interface Function status (Status)
6 - 93
6.10.2 Manipulating the MES Interface Function status (Operation)
The operation status of the MES interface function can be manipulated.
(1) Stop
1 Selecting the [Stop] radio button and clicking the Execute button stops the
operation of the MES interface function.
Point
If a job is in execution, the MES interface function will stop upon completion of the
job.
For completion of a job in which a communication error has occurred, refer to the
following:
Section 5.3 (c) When actions are set for a job
(2) Restart
1 Selecting the [Restart] radio button and clicking the Execute button restarts the
operation of the stopped MES interface function.
6 - 94
6.10 Diagnosis
6.10.2 Manipulating the MES Interface Function status (Operation)
1
6.10.3 Changing the job status (Change job status)
OVERVIEW
The job status can be changed.
Point
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
The job status changed by this operation returns to the status set in [Job settings]
by powering OFF and ON or resetting the GOT.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
1 From [Job list], select the job whose status is to be changed.
2 Select a checkbox of the status to be changed.
The job is enabled and thereby it is executed when the trigger
conditions are met.
• Not checked
The job is disabled, and thereby it is not executed even if the
trigger conditions are met.
• Checked
The startup logging is enabled, and thereby startup records are
Enable startup logging *1
logged.
• Not checked
The startup logging is disabled, and thereby startup records are
not logged.
• Checked
The detailed logging is enabled, and thereby detailed records are
Enable detailed logging *2
not logged.
• Checked
device
Writing to PLC devices is disabled.
8
• Not checked
TROUBLESHOOTING
Writing to PLC devices is enabled.
• Checked *3
Disable writing to database
7
logged.
• Not checked
The detailed logging is disabled, and thereby detailed records are
Disable writing to GOT
6
Writing to the database is disabled.
• Not checked
Writing to the database is enabled.
6.10 Diagnosis
6.10.3 Changing the job status (Change job status)
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Enable job
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Description
• Checked
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Item
5
6 - 95
*1
The startup log can be confirmed in [Job Execute Log] on the [Working log] tab.
*2
Section 6.11.2 Job Execute Log
[Enable detailed logging] is selectable only when [Test mode] is selected in [Job settings].
Section 6.7.1 (5) Test mode
When [Enable detailed logging] is checked, [Enable startup logging] is also selected.
The detailed log can be confirmed in [Job Execute Log] on the [Working log] tab.
*3
Section 6.11.2 Job Execute Log
When [Disable writing to database] is checked, the following processing are executed.
• The SQL text is sent to a database, and then the rollback is executed at the last.
Errors occur when the server service settings and the settings for the actions in [Job settings],
including table names and field names, are incorrect.
When an error occurs, check the settings.
• With Wonderware Historian, the following SQL text is sent because the rollback cannot be
used.
INSERT INTO History (Data Time, TagName,Value) SELECT TOP 0 NULL.
NULL. NULL:
Errors occur when the server service settings are incorrect.
When an error occurs, check the server service settings.
No error occurs even though the settings for the action in [Job settings] are incorrect.
3 Clicking the Execute button changes the job status.
6 - 96
6.10 Diagnosis
6.10.3 Changing the job status (Change job status)
1
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Connection with the server computer set in [Server service settings], which is made at the
time of the previous job execution, can be checked.
The following explains the display of [Connection result of previous job execution].
OVERVIEW
6.10.4 Checking the connection of the previous job execution (Connection
result of previous job execution)
SPECIFICATIONS
3
previous job execution.
Initial status (Not connected to the database server computer), or
Disconnected
normal connection could not be established at the previous job
execution and thereby the line was disconnected.
Point
• The display of the connection result is not changed until the next job is
executed to communicate the database server computer.
• The result of the one-shot communication with the database server
computer is not reflected.
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Connected
Description
Normally connected to the server computer at the time of the
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Displayed result
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.10 Diagnosis
6.10.4 Checking the connection of the previous job execution (Connection result of previous job execution)
6 - 97
6.10.5 Manipulating DB buffering (DB buffering operation)
Operate the DB buffering.
For the DB buffering function, refer to the following:
Section 5.1.10 DB buffering function
(1) Number of bufferings and Buffer utilization
This section explains checking the number of data buffered, the current buffer
utilizations, and the highest buffer utilizations of the DB buffering function.
Description
Display
No. of bufferings *1
Buffer utilization *1
*1
*2
Highest value*2
Current value
Shows the current number of bufferings
Shows the number of bufferings (number
(number of buffered jobs).
of buffered jobs) in the past.
Shows the current buffer utilization.
Shows the highest buffer utilization in the
past.
A value is not displayed when the value is being obtained or could not be obtained.
Any of the following operation clears the highest value.
• Power off the GOT.
• Reset the GOT (when changing the communication settings, etc.)
• Install the OS from GT Designer2
• Download project data, etc.
• Restart the MES interface function
• One-shot execution
Note that the highest value is not cleared if the MES interface function was stopped by the
diagnostics function.
(2) Resending data stored in the DB buffer
1 Clicking the Resend button executes the resend processing of the SQL texts
stored in the DB buffer, when manual resend is selected for the jobs of the SQL
texts.
If resend processing fails, an error will be output to the MES interface Execute
Log.
(3) Clearing the DB buffer
1 Clicking the Clear button clears all of the SQL texts that are stored in the DB
buffer.
6 - 98
6.10 Diagnosis
6.10.5 Manipulating DB buffering (DB buffering operation)
1
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
This section explains checking the number of data buffered, the current buffer utilizations,
and the highest buffer utilizations of the trigger buffering function.
For the trigger buffering function, refer to the following:
Section 5.1.5 Trigger buffering function
OVERVIEW
6.10.6 Checking the trigger buffering (Trigger buffering status)
3
No. of bufferings *1
Shows the current number of bufferings
Shows the number of bufferings
(number of buffered jobs).
(number of buffered jobs) in the past.
A value is not displayed when the value is being obtained or could not be obtained.
Any of the following operation clears the highest value.
• Power off the GOT.
• Reset the GOT (when changing the communication settings, etc.)
• Install the OS from GT Designer2
• Download project data, etc.
• Restart the MES interface function
• One-shot execution
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
*1
*2
Highest value*2
Point
When a large number of data is buffered, check the number of job settings and the
trigger condition setting.
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Current value
SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Display
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.10 Diagnosis
6.10.6 Checking the trigger buffering (Trigger buffering status)
6 - 99
6.11 Working Log
The operation log of the MES interface function can be checked.
In [Working log], the MES interface Execute Log and the Job Execute Log of the GOT can
be checked.
1 Click the [Working log] tab.
2 The [Working log] sheet is displayed.
3 Click the Acquire button.
4 Log data are displayed.
5 Operate this screen referring to the following descriptions.
6 - 100
6.11 Working Log
1
6.11.1 MES Interface Execute Log
OVERVIEW
(1) The MES interface function execution log is displayed.
Data displayed in the MES Interface Execute Log are shown below.
Item
Date
Description
2
Displays the date and time on which an error occurred.
Error code
For error codes, refer to the following:
Summary
Displays an error message.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Displays an error code of the error occurred.
Section 8.1 Error Handling and Recovery Method
(2) Updating the MES interface Execute Log
3
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Clicking the Acquire button updates the MES interface Execute Log.
1 Clicking the Clear button clears the historical data in the MES interface Execute
Log.
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
(3) Clearing the MES interface Execute Log
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.11 Working Log
6.11.1 MES Interface Execute Log
6 - 101
6.11.2 Job Execute Log
This area displays event log data of the jobs whose executions have been completed.
There are two kinds of Job Execute Log data: [Startup log] and [Detailed log], by which the
job startup history and job execution details can be checked respectively.
(1) Startup log
Startup log data of the jobs, each of which has [Startup logging] setting in [Job
settings], are displayed.
Section 6.7.1 (4) Startup logging
The following explains the display of the Startup log.
(a) Icon
The completion status of the job is displayed as an icon in the Job Execute Log
area.
The following explains the status of each icon.
Icon
Description
The job was completed normally. (No detailed log)
The job was completed normally. (With detailed log)
Selecting the job and clicking the View details
button displays
the [View details] dialog box.
The job was canceled. (No detailed log)
The job was canceled. (With detailed log)
Selecting the job and clicking the View details button displays the
[View details] dialog box.
(b) Date
The date and time of job startup is displayed.
(c) Job name
Started jobs are displayed.
(d) Summary
Trigger instructions are displayed.
Display
6 - 102
Description
Start
Shows that any job other than handshake operation was activated.
Handshake start
Shows that job execution of handshake operation was activated.
Handshake end
Shows that job execution of handshake operation was completed.
6.11 Working Log
6.11.2 Job Execute Log
1
Detailed log data of the jobs, each of which has [Test mode] setting in [Job settings],
are displayed.
Section 6.7.1 (5) Test mode
OVERVIEW
(2) Detailed log
Do not remove the CF card from the GOT during detailed log output.
1 Selecting a job of
or
icon and clicking the View details button displays the
[View details] dialog box.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
Point
3
SPECIFICATIONS
2 The following explains the display of the [View details] dialog box.
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
Action list
6
Description
Displays a list of executed job actions.
Selecting an action displays its action details.
Program execution result
Displays a program execution result before execution of the first
(before action)
action.
Action details *1 *2 *3
Displays a program execution result after execution of the last action.
7
Displays the action details.
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
(after action)
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Program execution result
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Item
6.11 Working Log
6.11.2 Job Execute Log
6 - 103
*1
In the case of Communication action
1)
2)
6)
3)
4)
5)
7)
Display
1)
Description
Type, Database, Table
Displays data of [Action type], [Database], and [Table name], which
name
were set in [Communication action].
Displays the number of records specified for [Specify the maximum
number of acquiring records] in the Multi select setting screen for the
2)
Request record No.
communication action.
When the number of records is not specified, [No specification] is
displayed.
Displays the execution result of the SQL text.
• When succeeded
3)
Execution result
[Success] is displayed.
• When failed
[Failed] is displayed.
• When [Select] or [MultiSelect] is selected for [Action type]
The number of records that meet the Select/Update conditions is
displayed.
• When [Update] is selected for [Action type]
The number of updated records is displayed.
• When [Insert] is selected for [Action type] ([Insert records No.] is
4)
Applicable record No.
displayed.)
(Insert records No.)
The number of inserted records is displayed.
When the database is Wonderware
Historian, the number of
inserted records is displayed as 0 with the following operations and
settings.
• Test mode • One-shot execution
• Settings without writing to the database
6 - 104
5)
Acquired record No.
6)
DB-tag link settings
7)
SQL text
6.11 Working Log
6.11.2 Job Execute Log
Displays the number of acquired records when [Select] or [MultiSelect]
is selected for [Action type].
Displays data of [DB-tag link settings], which were set in
[Communication action].
The SQL text executed in [Communication action] is displayed.
1
In the case of Operation action
OVERVIEW
*2
1)
2)
2
Description
Upper row
Displays the settings of [Operation action].
2)
Lower row
Displays values calculated in [Operation action].
*3
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Display
1)
In the case of Transmit resource action
1)
SPECIFICATIONS
3
3)
4)
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
2)
5)
6)
Display
Displays data of [Action type], [Database], and [Table name], which
name
were set in [Communication action].
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Type, Database, Table
Displays the execution result of the SQL text.
• When succeeded
2)
Execution result
[Success] is displayed.
• When failed
6
[Failed] is displayed.
3)
Resource type, Logging ID/
Alarm ID, Operation log file
Displays the data of [Resource type], [Logging ID/Alarm ID], and
[Operation log file] (the stored location for the operation log file) set for
[Transmit resource action].
Displays the field name set on [Field name setting] in [Transmit
resource action] and the substitute value.
• When the resource data to be sent exists
4)
Field name setting
Displays the substitute value sent the first.
• When the resource data to be sent does not exist. (all or part of the
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
1)
5
Description
7
action].
Displays 0 in the following cases.
5)
No. of execute SQL
• When sending no resource data (substitute values for all the fields)
• When a communication error occurs between the GOT and the
database
• When the SQL text cannot be sent to the database.
Displays the SQL text executed for [Transmit resource action].
6)
SQL text
Displays no data when sending no resource data (all or part of
substitute values for the field)
6.11 Working Log
6.11.2 Job Execute Log
6 - 105
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
No data is inserted to [Value(1st rec.)].
Displays the number of the SQL texts sent for [Transmit resource
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
substitute value for the field)
(3) Updating the Job Execute Log
1 Clicking the Update
Acquire button updates the Job Execute Log.
(4) Clearing the Job Execute Log
1 Clicking the Clear button clears the Job Execute Log.
6 - 106
6.11 Working Log
6.11.2 Job Execute Log
1
OVERVIEW
6.12 Precautions
Precautions for the MES interface function setting are described below.
(2) When deleting an item
Deleting an item such as [Device tag settings] is not allowed when the selected item is
used for another item such as [Job settings].
As the error dialog box appears, identify the location, stop using it for another item,
and then delete the item.
3
SPECIFICATIONS
Adding a new MES interface setting, or editing or deleting an existing one is
performed on the MES interface function setting screen.
To newly add, edit or delete a MES interface setting, have the MES interface function
setting screen displayed on GT Designer2.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
(1) When adding, editing or deleting a MES interface setting
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
Up to ten locations of usage are displayed in the error dialog box.
If the item is used in 11 other items or more, the dialog box is displayed as shown
below.
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
6.12 Precautions
6 - 107
(3) Type mismatch
(a) Value substitution
A value is assigned to a tag component after the type of the source is converted
into the type of the tag component.
A value is assigned to a variable after the type of the variable is converted into the
type of the substitution source.
(Example) Type conversion of tag components and variables
Because the operation result is out of the range for the integer type,
the variable Temp1 is the floating-point type.
A value is assigned after being converted to the type for the tag component.
For example, when the tag component, Data1, is double-precision type data,
the type of the variable, Temp1, is converted from floating-point to doubleprecision first, and then the converted value is assigned.
If a type that cannot be converted is assigned to a tag component, the job
execution is canceled.
At this time, "Type conversion to tag component error" is displayed in the MES
interface Execute Log.
(b) Operation of numerical values
There are two kinds of numerical values: Integer type and Floating-point type.
• Integer type: Represents the bit type, single-precision type, and doubleprecision type of tag components.
• Floating-point type: Represents the floating-point type of tag components.
The following table lists operation items and types of the results.
Item
Operation result
Operation of floating-point type Floating-point type in all cases
Addition, subtraction,
In the range from -2147483648 to 2147483647: Integer type
multiplication of Integer type
Exceeding the above range: Floating-point type
Divisible: Integer type
Not divisible: Floating-point type
Division of Integer type
When zero divide is executed, the job execution is canceled.
At this time, "Zero divide error" is displayed in the MES interface
Execute Log.
6 - 108
6.12 Precautions
1
2) Other operators
When both of the operands can be converted to numerical values, the
operation is performed using the numerical values.
Both or either of them cannot be converted to numerical values, the job
execution is canceled.
At this time, "Operation error" is displayed in the MES interface Execute Log.
3) Operation between a character string type value and a numerical type value
Same as the case of the operation between character string type values
(4) Precautions resource data send action
(a) Checking resource data
The settings for collecting the resource data must be matched to the settings for
the resource data send action. When the settings are not matched, an error may
occur at the job execution.
When setting for the resource data send action, click the Confirm setting button,
and then check that [No problem in the resource setting.] is displayed.
When the resource data send action setting differs from the setting for collecting
the resource data, the following error message are displayed.
Resource type
Error message
Logging function setting
Logging
does not exist.
Corrective action
Set [Logging Setting].
The logging ID is not
Set the logging ID in [Logging ID/Alarm ID] that is set
available.
for [Logging Setting].
alarm
function setting does not
Set [Advanced User Alarm Observation].
exist.
The alarm ID is not
Set the alarm ID in [Logging ID/Alarm ID] that is set
available.
for [Advanced User Alarm Observation].
Advanced system
Advanced system alarm
Check [Use System Alarm] for [Advanced System
alarm
function is not available.
Alarm].
Operation log function is not Check [Use Operation Log Settings] for [Operation
5
available.
Log Setting].
The operation log file name
Click the Set operation log file name button to obtain
is mismatch.
the stored file for the operation log setting.
7
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation log
4
6
Advanced user alarm
Advanced user
SPECIFICATIONS
3
Cancellation of job execution
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
"4"
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
"31AH"
"1248"
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Example:"312" "4"
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
"ABCDEFGHIJ"
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
1) + operator
Combines character strings.
Example: "ABCDEFG" + "HIJ"
OVERVIEW
(c) Operation between character string type values
6.12 Precautions
6 - 109
(b) Conditions for sending the sent resource data
When restarting the GOT, the GOT may send the sent data.
Multiple records are created in the database when the GOT sends the sent data.
The following shows conditions for sending the sent resource data.
Resource type
Logging
Advanced user alarm
Advanced system alarm
Operation log
Condition
No sent resource data is sent.
• When restarting the GOT, the sent resource data is stored in the alarm
log file.
• When restarting the GOT, the sent resource data is stored in the alarm
log file.
• When restarting the GOT, the sent resource data is stored in the
operation log file.
(c) Collecting no resource data when executing an action
1) When the data in the field set for [Field name setting] does not exist.
The GOT sends the data of "" (Null) to the field.
The following resource data shows the resource data types with no data
depending on conditions.
Resource type
Insert data
Action execution
Logging
LoggingDevice
Sending no data
Advanced user alarm
Comments
Sending ""(Null) data
None
-
Advanced system
alarm
Object name(OPNAME), Operation
level(OPERATOR), Operation
level(OPE_ID), User ID(USER_ID), Action
Operation log
No.(ACT_NO), Data type(DATA_TYPE),
Sending no data
Device name(DEV_NAME), Change
value(CHG_VALUE), Previous
value(PREV_VALUE)
Point
Set "null-capable" in the fields for the database.
Without setting "null-capable", an error occurs at the job execution.
For the database setting, refer to the manual for the database to be used.
2) Collecting no resource data after the last action
The action is succeeded without communicating the GOT with the database.
(The MESInterface Execute Log is output.)
The access log is not output to the server computer.
6 - 110
6.12 Precautions
This chapter explains DB Connection Service and DB Connection Service Setting Tool.
7.1 DB Connection Service Functions
Installing DB Connection Service on the server computer allows to use the MES interface
function of the GOT.
The following shows the functions of the DB Connection Service.
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
CHAPTER 7 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING
TOOL
OVERVIEW
1
3
Section 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
(3) When using DB Connection Service on an application server computer, an
account for user program execution must be created beforehand.
(4) Changes to the DB Connection Service settings are made with DB
Connection Service Setting Tool.
Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
(1) It is necessary to install DB Connection Service on all the database server
computers and application server computers to be accessed from the GOT.
(2) When using DB Connection Service on a database server computer, the
ODBC setting for the database used must be made beforehand.
SPECIFICATIONS
Point
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
7.1 DB Connection Service Functions
7-1
(1) ODBC connection function
The OBDC connection function connects the GOT and the ODBC interface for
database.
The following shows operation on the database server computer.
Database
Database server
computer
ODBC
DB Connection
Service
MES interface
function
When
accessed
Access
log
When SQL
execution failed
SQL
failure log
1 Receives SQL texts from the GOT.
2 Accesses the database via ODBC interface and executes the SQL text.
3 Sends the SQL text execution results to the GOT.
7-2
7.1 DB Connection Service Functions
1
(2) Program execution function
OVERVIEW
The program execution function executes a program on an application server
computer upon request from the GOT.
The following shows operation on the application server computer.
2
Application server
computer
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Program
3
SPECIFICATIONS
DB Connection
Service
When
accessed
4
Executes programs on the application server computer.
3
Sends the program execution results to the GOT.
(3) IP filter function (
connect)
5
Section 7.5 (3) Limit IP addresses which permit to
The IP filter function allows specification of the IP address of the GOT that can
connect to the DB Connection Service, ensuring the security of the server computer.
Batch specification using the mask bit length specification is possible.
If the IP filter function is not used, any GOT can connect to DB Connection Service.
(4) Log output function
DB Connection Service outputs an access log and an SQL failure log.
(a) Access log (
Section 7.5 (4) Output access log)
The communication contents between the GOT and DB Connection Service are
output to the access log.
For access log specifications, refer to the following.
Section 7.8.1 Access log
(b) SQL failure log (
Section 7.5 (5) Output SQL failed log)
If data cannot be updated/inserted normally due to an error such as no table at
SQL text execution, the error information is output to the SQL failure log.
For SQL failure log specifications, refer to the following.
Section 7.8.2 SQL failure log
7.1 DB Connection Service Functions
7-3
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
2
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Receives a program execution request from the GOT.
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
1
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Access
log
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
MES interface
function
7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
When using DB Connection Service on a database server computer, the ODBC setting for
the database used must be done beforehand.
For the ODBC setting, refer to the following.
Manuals and online help for the database software and operating system (OS) used
(1) When Oracle 8i, 9i or 10g is used
(This section gives a setting example of using Oracle 9i Standard Edition in
Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System.)
Set the following conditions.
• Data source name *1 : SAMPLEDS
• TNS Service Name *2 : SAMPLETNS
• OracleHome: OraHome92
*1
Data source name can be set as desired.
For [Data source name] in [Server service settings], use the name set with this setting.
*2
The TNS service name is the name for accessing an Oracle
database.
The name is entered when installing Oracle and creating a database instance.
This can be checked with [Configuration and Migration Tools] - [Net Manager] - [Service naming] of
Oracle .
(Start)
1 Clicking [Performance and Maintenance] in
Control Panel displays the [Performance and
Maintenance] dialog box.
To display Control Panel, select [Start]
[Control
Panel].
(To the next page)
7-4
7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
1
2
Double-clicking [Administrative Tools] displays the
[Administrative Tools] dialog box.
OVERVIEW
(From the previous page)
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
Double-clicking [Data Sources (ODBC)] displays
the [ODBC Data Source Administrator] dialog box.
Select the [System DSN] tab, and click the Add
button.
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
3
SPECIFICATIONS
3
5
The [Create New Data Source] dialog box is
displayed. Select [Oracle in OraHome92].
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
4
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
In the displayed [Oracle ODBC Driver
Configuration] dialog box, set the following.
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
• [Data source name]: SAMPLEDS
• [TNS Service Name]: SAMPLETNS
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
(To the next page)
7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
7-5
(From the previous page)
6 Clicking the Connection test button displays the
[Oracle ODBC Driver Connect] dialog box. Enter
the user name and password, then click the
OK
button.
7 If the connection is normal, the confirmation dialog
box appears.
8 Click the
OK
button in the [Oracle ODBC
Driver Configuration] dialog box.
9 Click the
(Completed)
7-6
7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
OK
button in the [ODBC Data Source
Administrator] dialog box.
(2) For Microsoft SQL Server 2000, Microsoft SQL Server 2005, MSDE 2000
and Wonderware Historian 9.0
(The following shows a setting example using Microsoft SQL Server 2000 with
Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System.)
Set the following conditions.
OVERVIEW
1
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
• Data source name*1: SAMPLEDS
• Server name*2: SAMPLESRV
*1
Data source name can be set as desired.
For [Data source name] in [Server service settings], use the name set with this setting.
*2
The server name is the name for accessing a Microsoft
SQL Server 2000 database.
3
This name is entered when installing Microsoft SQL Server 2000.
This can be checked with the SQL Server service manager server.
Clicking [Performance and Maintenance] on the
Control Panel displays the [Performance and
Maintenance] dialog box.
To display the Control Panel, select [Start]
[Control Panel].
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
1
SPECIFICATIONS
(Start)
2
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
Clicking [Administrative Tools] displays
[Administrative Tools] dialog box.
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
3
Double clicking [Data Sources (ODBC)] displays
[ODBC Data Source Administrator] dialog box.
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Select the [System DSN] tab, then click the Add
button.
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
(To the next page)
7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
7-7
(From the previous page)
4 The [Create New Data Source] dialog box is
displayed, then select [SQL Server].
5 The [Create a New Data Source to SQL Server]
dialog box is displayed, then set the following.
• [Data source name]: SAMPLEDS
• [Server name]: SAMPLESRV
6 Select the [With SQL Server authentication using
a login ID and password entered by the user.]
radio button, then enter [Login ID] and [Password].
REMARKS
Setting Wonderware Historian
Mark a check in [Change the default value to] and
select [Runtime].
(To the next page)
7-8
7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
1
8
In the [ODBC Microsoft SQL Server Setup] dialog
box, click the [Test Data Source] button to check
that the connection is normal.
Click the
OK
button in the [SQL Server ODBC
3
Data Source Test] dialog box.
Click the
OK
button in the [ODBC Microsoft
SPECIFICATIONS
9
SQL Server Setup] dialog box.
10 Click the
OK
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
7
OVERVIEW
(From the previous page)
button in the [ODBC Data
Source Administrator] dialog box.
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
(End)
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
7-9
(3) For Microsoft Access 2000, Microsoft Access 2003, and Microsoft Access
2007
(The following shows a setting example using Microsoft Access 2003 with
Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System.)
Set the following conditions.
• Data source name*1: SAMPLEDS
• Database name*2: C \ mes \ sampledb.mdb
*1
Data source name can be set as desired.
For [Data source name] in [Server service settings], use the name set with this setting.
*2
The database name is the name for accessing a Microsoft
Specify a database file path created with Microsoft
Access 2003 database.
Access 2003.
(Start)
1 Clicking [Performance and Maintenance] on the
Control Panel displays the [Performance and
Maintenance] dialog box.
To display the Control Panel, select [Start]
[Control Panel].
2 Clicking [Administrative Tools] displays
[Administrative Tools] dialog box.
3 Double clicking [Data Sources (ODBC)] displays
[ODBC Data Source Administrator] dialog box.
Select the [System DSN] tab, then click the Add
button.
(To the next page)
7 - 10
7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
1
(From the previous page)
5
The [Create New Data Source] dialog box is
displayed, then select [Microsoft Access
Driver(*.mdb)].
OVERVIEW
4
2
When using Microsoft Access 2007
Select "Microsoft Access Driver(*.mdb. *accdb)".
7
The [ODBC Microsoft Access Setup] dialog box is
displayed. Set the following and click the
[Database] selection button.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
6
SPECIFICATIONS
• [Data source name]: SAMPLEDS
3
8
The [Select Database] dialog box is displayed.
Select the following and click the
OK
button.
• [Folder]: C \ mes
• [Database Name]: sampledb.mdb
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
9
Click the
OK
button in the [ODBC Microsoft
Access Setup] dialog box.
10 Click the
OK
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
6
button in the [ODBC Data
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Source Administrator] dialog box.
(End)
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
7 - 11
7.3 Starting DB Connection Service Setting Tool
For information on how to start DB Connection Service Setting Tool, refer to the following
manual.
GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Section 2.4 Starting
the Software)
Point
Only one DB Connection Service Setting Tool can be activated.
7 - 12
7.3 Starting DB Connection Service Setting Tool
1
OVERVIEW
7.4 Screen Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool
This section explains the screen structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool.
7.4.1 Screen structure
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
Menu
Section 7.4.2 Menu configuration
SPECIFICATIONS
3
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
7.4 Screen Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool
7.4.1 Screen structure
7 - 13
7.4.2 Menu configuration
This section shows each command provided on the menu bar.
(1) File
Item
Description
Import
Imports an existing file.
Export
Exports the DB Connection Service Setting Tool to a file.
Exit
Exits the DB Connection Service Setting Tool.
Reference
section
Section 7.6
-
(2) Help
Item
Description
Product information
Displays product information of the DB Connection Service Setting Tool.
Connect to MELFANSweb
Displays the [Connect to MELFANSweb] screen.
7 - 14
7.4 Screen Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool
7.4.2 Menu configuration
Reference
section
Section 7.7
1
OVERVIEW
7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool
The following shows how to change the DB Connection Service settings.
1 Set the following items and click the Reflect settings button.
2 After updating the settings, check for an error by selecting [Administrative Tools] Section 8.1 (2) Error checking procedure
Point
3
Section 6.10.2 Manipulating the MES Interface Function status
(Operation)
(2) If any changed settings are entered with a job using DB Connection Service
being operating, the execution of the connected job is canceled and a
communication error occurs.
Also, for a job to which [Enable DB buffering] is selected, SQLtexts are
buffered in the DB buffer.
4
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Change the DB Connection Service settings while a job using the DB
Connection Service is not operating.
The status is as follows:
• The GOT is powered OFF.
• The MES interface function operation is stopped by [MES interface
setting] - [Diagnosis] tab.
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
3
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
[Event Viewer] in Windows .
2
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool
7 - 15
Item
Service port (required)
Description
Set the number of a port through which the DB Connection Service
operates.
Set a DB access timeout time (Unit: seconds) for writing/reading a
DB access timeout
database value from the GOT to the server computer, or for the case
where no response is returned after request for program execution.
Limit IP addresses which
Specify whether or not to set IP addresses to which connection is to be
permit to connect
permitted.
Output access log
Set whether or not to output the access log.
Output SQL failed log
Set whether or not to output the SQL failure log.
(1) Service port (required) (Range: 1024 to 65535, Default: 5112)
Set the number of a port through which the DB Connection Service operates.
The specified port number is used for communications with the GOT.
Set the same value in [Service port] as the one set in [Port No.] in [Server service
settings] under [MES interface setting].
Section 6.6.1 Setting items in Server service settings
(2) DB access timeout (required) (Range: 1 to 3600; Default: 30)
Set a DB access timeout time (Unit: seconds) for writing/reading a database value
from the GOT to the server computer, or for the case where no response is returned
after request for program execution.
When a timeout occurs, the connection with the GOT is disconnected and job
execution is canceled.
Point
Set a value to [DB access timeout] so that the relation with a value set in
[Connection timeout] in [MES Interface Configuration Tool] is as follows:
• Connection timeout value
7 - 16
7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool
DB access timeout value
1
(b) When [limit IP addresses which permit to connect] is selected, set IP address(es).
1) Adding an IP address to permit its connection
<Specifying individual IP addresses>
Description
Set an IP address in decimal notation so that its connection will be
IP address
permitted.
Mask bit length
4
(Blank)
The IP address is added to the [Permitted IP addresses list].
(Example) 192.168.0.64
<Specifying IP addresses in a batch>
Set the following items and click the Add button.
Item
IP address
Mask bit length
Set an IP address in decimal notation so that its connection will be
permitted.
Set the effective bit length of the set IP address.
(Range: 1 to 32)
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
The IP address/mask bit length is added to the [Permitted IP addresses list].
(Example) 192.168.0.64/26
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
2
5
Description
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
1
SPECIFICATIONS
Set the following items and click the Add button.
Item
2
3
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
1
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(a) Specify whether or not to set IP addresses to which connection is to be permitted.
If the [limit IP addresses which permit to connect] box is checked, connection is
permitted from only the GOT with the specified IP address.
For IP addresses that are permitted to connect to DB Connection Service, at least
one IP address setting is required and up to 64 addresses can be set.
If the box is not checked, connection from any GOT will be permitted.
OVERVIEW
(3) Limit IP addresses which permit to connect
7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool
7 - 17
(Example) Specifying IP addresses in a batch
If [192.168.0.64] is set for [IP address] and [26] for [Mask bit length], the IP
addresses set for connection permission are [192.168.0.64] to [192.168.0.127],
as the logical product is [192.168.0.64].
IP address permitted
to connect
192
168
0
?
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 ? ? ? ? ? ?
Mask bit length (26)
255
255
255
192
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Logical product
IP address
192
168
0
64
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
The range in which the logical product above is met is between 192.168.0.64 to 127.
192
168
0
64
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
192
168
0
127
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2) Deleting an IP address with connection permission
1 Select the IP address to be deleted from [Permitted IP addresses list], then click
the Delete button.
(4) Output access log
(Default: Output)
(a) Set whether or not to output the access log.
(b) When [Output access log] is selected, set the following items.
Item
Description
Output destination
Set the output destination of the log file.
Access log capacity
Set the capacity for one access log file and the number of files.
1) Output destination (Default: "dbConnector.log")
Set the output destination of the log file.
If no output destination is set, the log is output to the install folder.
If a read-only file is specified, the log is not output and an [Access log output
error] is output to [Event Viewer] of [Administrative Tools] in Windows .
2) Access log capacity (Range: 1 to 10MB
2 to 100 files, Default: 1MB
10
files)
Set the capacity for one access log file and number of files.
If the log exceeds the capacity for one file, the data are copied to a file of the
original name with a number attached and a new log file is created.
If the total number of files exceeds the set number of files, files are deleted in
order from the oldest one.
7 - 18
7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool
1
OVERVIEW
(Example) When [Output destination] is set as [dbConnector.log] and [Access
capacity] as [1MB
3 files]
Capacity over
Ne
1
dbConnector.log
Re
na
me
dbConnector.log.001
dbConnector.log.001
Re
na
me
dbConnector.log.002
Files
within the
specified
number of
files
3
dbConnector.log.002
De
let
2
[dbConnector.log.001] is renamed as [dbConnector.log.002].
3
The total number of files exceeds 3 if [dbConnector.log.002] is renamed,
therefore [dbConnector.log.002] is deleted.
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
When [dbConnector.log] exceeds 1M byte, it is renamed as
[dbConnector.log.001].
A new [dbConnector.log] is created and logging resumes.
SPECIFICATIONS
e
1
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
2
w
dbConnector.log
5
(5) Output SQL failed log
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
(Default: Output)
(a) Set whether or not to output the SQL failure log.
(b) When [Output SQL failed log] is selected, set the following items.
Set the capacity for one SQL failure log file and the number of files.
1) Output destination (Default: "SQLFailed.log")
Set the output destination of the log file.
If no output destination is set, the log is output to the install folder.
If a read-only file is specified, the log is not output and an [SQL failure log
output error] is output to [Event Viewer] of [Administrative Tools] in Windows .
2) SQL failure log capacity (Range: 1 to 10MB
2 to 100 files, Default: 1MB
10 files)
Set the capacity for one SQL failure log file and the number of files.
If the log exceeds the capacity for one file, the data are copied to a file of the
original name with a number attached and a new log file is created.
If the total number of files exceeds the set number of files, files are deleted in
order from the oldest one.
7.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool
7 - 19
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
SQL failure log capacity
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
Description
Set the output destination of the log file.
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Item
Output destination
7.6 Importing/Exporting Files
Import/export files.
(1) Import
An existing file can be imported.
1 Select [File]
[Import] from the menu.
2 The [Open] dialog box is displayed.
Set the following items, then click the Open button.
Item
Look in
File name
Files of type
Description
Select the location where the file is stored.
Specify the name of the file to be imported.
Select a type of the file to be imported.
• DB connection service setting files
(2) Export
DB Connection Service Setting Tool can be exported to a file.
1 Select [File]
[Export] from the menu.
2 The [Save As] dialog box is displayed.
Set the following items, then click the button.
Item
Select the location where the file is to be saved.
File name
Specify the name of the file to be saved.
Files of type
7 - 20
Description
Save in
7.6 Importing/Exporting Files
Select a type of the file to be saved.
• DB connection service setting files
1
The product information of the DB Connection Service Setting Tool and the Connect to
MELFANSweb screen can be displayed.
OVERVIEW
7.7 Help
2
Select [Help]
[Product information] from the menu.
2
The [Product information] dialog box of the DB Connection Service Setting Tool is
displayed.
3
SPECIFICATIONS
1
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
(1) Product information
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
(2) Connect to MELFANSweb
Select [Help]
2
The [Connect to MELFANSweb] dialog box is displayed.
6
[Connect to MELFANSweb] from the menu.
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
1
3
Clicking the
4
Online manuals and other information can be viewed on the website.
displays the MELFANSweb page.
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
OK
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
7.7 Help
7 - 21
7.8 Output Log Specifications
The following shows the output log format for the access log and SQL failure log given in
Section 7.8.1 and later.
[Date] [Error code] message Line feed
Item
Description
First line
1st to 4th bytes from the line
Year
head
Year - Month delimiter
6th and 7th bytes from the
Month
line head
Month - Day delimiter
8th byte from the line head
9th and 10th bytes from the
Day
line head
Day - Hour delimiter
[Date]
5th byte from the line head
the line head
Hour - Minute delimiter
the line head
Minute - Second delimiter
the line head
Output
Second - Millisecond
character
delimiter
line head
Millisecond - Error code delimiter
[Error code]*1
Error code - Message delimiter
2-digit integer (00 to 59) (Numbers)
2-digit integer (00 to 59) (Numbers)
3-digit integer (000 to 999) (Numbers)
25th to 34th bytes from the
Alphanumeric character of "0x"+8-
line head
digithexadecimal
35th byte from the line head " " (Space: 20H)
the line head
Line feed
2-digit integer (00 to 23) (Numbers)
24th byte from the line head " " (Space: 20H)
36th and later bytes from
Message
2-digit integer (01 to 31) (Numbers)
20th byte from the line head "." (Period: 2EH)
21st to 23rd bytes from the
Millisecond
"/" (Slash: 2FH)
17th byte from the line head ":" (Colon: 3AH)
18th and 19th bytes from
Second
2-digit integer (01 to 12) (Numbers)
14th byte from the line head ":" (Colon: 3AH)
15th and 16th bytes from
Minute
"/" (Slash: 2FH)
11th byte from the line head " " (Space: 20H)
12th and 13th bytes from
Hour
Four-digit integer for year (Numbers)
Compliant with the specifications of each log
End of line
CR + LF (0DH, 0AH)
Line head
TAB (09H)
Second line (For database errors only)
Tab
Database message header
Database message header - Database
message delimiter
2nd to 17th bytes from the
line head
18th byte from the line head " " (Space: 20H)
19th and later bytes from
Database message
the line head
Line feed
End of line
*1
"Database Message "
Error messages that the database outputs
CR + LF (0DH, 0AH)
For error codes, refer to the following:
Section 8.1 Error Handling and Recovery Method
7 - 22
7.8 Output Log Specifications
1
7.8.1 Access log
OVERVIEW
The following explains the access log contents.
(1) Service start/end
2
(a) Start
Output log format
[Date] [Error code] Service Start
Example
2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 Service Start
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Description
(b) End
3
Description
[Date] [Error code] Service Stop
Example
2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 Service Stop
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Output log format
(2) Connection/disconnection from the GOT
(a) Connection
Item
Example
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Output log format
4
Description
[Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:MIFWS Connected:[Source IP]:[Target data source]:
[Connection ID]
2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:MIFWS Connected:192.168.3.3:DataSource:ID
(b) Disconnection
Item
Description
Output log format
[Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:MIFWS Disconnected:[Source IP]:[Target data source]:[Connection ID]
Example
2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:MIFWS Disconnected:192.168.3.3:DataSource:ID
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
(3) Connection/disconnection to a database
(a) Connection
Item
Description
Output log format
[Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:DB Connect:[Target data source]: [Connection ID]:[Connection result*1]
Example
2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:DB Connect:DataSource:ID:Success
*1
When succeeded: Success, when failed: Failed
(b) Disconnection
Item
result*1]
7
2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:DB Disconnect:DataSource:ID:Success
*1
When succeeded: Success, when failed: Failed
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Example
Description
[Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:DB Disconnect:[Target data source]: [Connection ID]:[Disconnection
6
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Output log format
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Item
7.8 Output Log Specifications
7.8.1 Access log
7 - 23
(4) SQL text reception/processing results
(a) SELECT
Item
Description
Output log format
[Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:SQL<[SQL text]>:[Processing result*2]([No. of selected records])
Example
2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:SQL<SELECT COL from TABLE;>:Success(1)
*2
When succeeded: Success ([No. of selected records]), when failed: Failed (Line feed) Database
message
(b) UPDATE
Item
Description
Output log format
[Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:SQL<[SQL text]>:[Processing result*3]([No. of updated records])
Example
2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:SQL<UPDATE TABLE SET COL = '';>:Success(1)
*3
When succeeded: Success ([No. of updated records]), when failed: Failed (Line feed) Database
message
(c) INSERT
Item
Output log format
Description
[Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:SQL<[SQL text]>:[Processing result*4]([No. of inserted records])
2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:SQL<INSERT INTO TABLE ( COL ) VALUES ('')
Example
;>:Success(1)
*4
When succeeded: Success ([No. of inserted records]), when failed: Failed (Line feed) Database
message
(d) COMMIT
Item
Description
Output log format
[Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:COMMIT:[Processing result*5]
Example
2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:COMMIT:Success
*5
When succeeded: Success, when failed: Failed (Line feed) Database message
(e) ROLLBACK
Item
Description
Output log format
[Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:ROLLBACK:[Processing result*6]
Example
2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:ROLLBACK:Success
*6
When succeeded: Success, when failed: Failed (Line feed) Database message
(f) GetNext (Request for next record)
Item
Description
Output log format
[Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:GetNext:[Processing result*1]
Example
2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 SID 0:GetNext:Success
*1
When succeeded: Success, when failed: Failed (Line feed) Database message
(5) Program execution reception/processing results
Item
Description
Output log format
[Date] [Error code] SID ProgramExec:[Source IP]:<[Command line]>[Processing result*2]([Return value])
Example
2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 ProgramExec:192.168.3.3:<hoge.exe>:Success(0)
*2
7 - 24
When succeeded: Success ([Return value]), when failed: Failed only
7.8 Output Log Specifications
7.8.1 Access log
1
7.8.2 SQL failure log
2
2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0x00000000 DataSource:INSERT INTO TABLE ( COL ) VALUES ('') ;
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Database Message 0x00000388 [Oracle][ODBC][Ora]ORA-00904: "NUM" :invalid identifier
SPECIFICATIONS
3
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
4
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
5
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
6
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Example
Description
[Date] [Error code] [Target data source]:[SQL text]
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Item
Output log format
OVERVIEW
The following shows the SQL failure log contents.
7.8 Output Log Specifications
7.8.2 SQL failure log
7 - 25
CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING
8.1 Error Handling and Recovery Method
This section describes how to check an error output when using the MES interface
function.
(1) Error checking and restoration
The following lists the points to be checked when an error occurred, and
corresponding recovery methods.
Error type
Check point
• Check a warning dialog displayed when a setting
MES interface setting error
out of the permitted range was made in the MES
interface function setting.
• Check the GOT for a system alarm.
MES interface function
execution error
• Check the MES interface Execute Log.
• Check the status information.
• Check the value of the tag component used for
notification.
DB Connection Service
setting error
• Check a warning dialog displayed when a setting
out of the permitted range was made in DB
Connection Service Setting Tool.
Recovery method
• When a value out of the permitted range has
been entered in the MES interface function
setting, disable the entry and return to the
previous status.
• If any problem is found in the setting, reconfigure
the MES interface setting and restart the GOT.
• For an error of the GOT or a controller, restore it
to normal condition according to its
specifications.
• When a value out of the permitted range has
been entered in DB Connection Service Setting
Tool, disable the entry and return to the previous
status.
• If any problem is found in the setting, reconfigure
DB Connection Service
execution error
• Check Event Viewer of Windows .
• Check the access log file.
• Check the SQL log file.
the settings in DB Connection Service Setting
Tool and restart DB Connection Service.
• If the server computer has a problem, resolve it
and restart DB Connection Service.
Point
If more than one error are displayed in the error log of [MESI/F Log] or by error
dialog boxes, take corrective actions in chronological order.
8-1
8.1 Error Handling and Recovery Method
1
(2) Error checking procedure
OVERVIEW
For error codes, refer to the following:
Section 8.2 Error Code List
Item
execution error
System alarm checking
Checking procedure
• For the system alarm checking procedure, refer to the following manual.
procedure
GT Designer2 Version
Working log checking
procedure *1
2
Shows how to check an error occurred in execution of the MES interface function.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
MES interface function
Screen Design Manual
• Connect the operating GOT to a configuration computer.
• Display the Working log sheet in the MES interface setting.
• Display the detailed log from the Working log sheet and check the data.
Status checking
• Connect the operating GOT to a configuration computer.
procedure
• Display the Diagnosis sheet in the MES interface setting and check the data.
3
SPECIFICATIONS
• Set a notification tag in the MES interface setting.
• Add a setting for monitoring the tag value on the GOT screen.
• On the GOT screen, check if an error or exception has occurred in the tag or not.
• Notification tags can be set for the following four items:
component value
checking procedure
• [Job settings] - [Communication action] - [Exception process setting] - [Exception processing:
4
No applicable record]
• [Job settings] - [Communication action] - [Exception process setting] - [Exception processing:
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Notification tag
Multiple applicable records]
• [Job settings] - [Communication action] - [Exception process setting] - [Exception processing:
Applicable records overflow]
• [Job settings] - [Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution]
• [Server service settings] - [Access error notification setting]
Windows
Event
Viewer checking
procedure
5
Shows how to check an error occurred in execution of DB Connection Service.
• From the Windows
start menu, select [Control Panel] - [Performance and Maintenance] -
[Administrative Tools] - [Event Viewer]. (Windows
XP)
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
execution error
• Select the Application log to display the list.
• Click on [Source] (sorting the list by the source name), and check for "DB Connector."
Access log checking
• In DB Connection Service Setting Tool, select [Output access log].
procedure
• Display the output file with Windows
SQL log checking
• In DB Connection Service Setting Tool, select [[Output SQL failed log].
procedure
• Display the output file with Windows
6
Notepad.
A CF card is required.
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
*1
Notepad.
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
DB Connection Service
8.1 Error Handling and Recovery Method
8-2
8.1.1 MES Interface Function setting
This section explains troubleshooting information on the setting of the MES interface
function.
(1) Common to all settings
Symptom
Checked item
Corrective action
• Check that no other GT Designer2 is
running and communicating on the same
Is the GOT communicating with another GT
Designer2?
personal computer.
• Check that GT Designer2 is not running
and communicating on other personal
computers.
Is there any disconnection in the
connection route?
Is there any problem on the personal
GT Designer2 cannot communicate with
computer?
GOT.
Is the port number correct?
(In RS-232 or Ethernet connection)
Is the GOT connected to the network?
(When using Ethernet connection)
Is the IP address setting correct?
(When using Ethernet connection)
Is there a firewall and/or a proxy server in
the connection route?
(In Ethernet connection)
All the text is not displayed in a table.
(The text display is truncated.)
Isn't the column width narrow?
(2) [Device tag settings] (
Symptom
Checked item
Is the selected item used in [DB buffering
Unable to change or delete an item in
setting] of [Option setting]?
[Device tag settings].
Is the selected item used in [Access error
notification setting] of [Server service
settings]?
8-3
• Replace it with another computer.
• Check the port number setting.
• Issue the ping command from the
personal computer to the GOT to confirm
the network connection.
• Correct the IP address setting.
• Ask your network administrator about the
firewall and proxy server settings.
• Adjust the column width of the table.
Section 6.3.1 Screen structure
Section 6.5 Device Tag Settings)
Is the selected item used in [Job settings]?
Unable to set or change [Device tag name].
• Connect the cables properly.
Is the same name used for [Server service
name] or another [Device tag name]?
8.1 Error Handling and Recovery Method
8.1.1 MES Interface Function setting
Corrective action
• As the error dialog box appears, identify
the location, stop using it for another
item, and then delete the item.
• An item used for another item is unable
to be deleted.
• Because a unique name must be used
for [Server service name] and [Device tag
name], use a different name.
1
Checked item
Corrective action
• Do not use Select actions in the job
where DB buffering is enabled.
• The DB buffering is not available for jobs
performing Select actions.
Unable to set a new variable.
Are there 64 variables that were already
defined in the job?
• Delete any unnecessary variable settings
of the job.
• Up to 64 variables can be set for one job.
• Select any other than [Handshake
Unable to select [Trigger 2] in [Trigger
Is [Handshake operation] selected for
conditions].
[Trigger 1]?
• When [Handshake operation] is selected,
Is the DB buffering enabled?
• Disable the DB buffering.
operation] for [Trigger 1].
selection is not allowed for [Trigger 2].
Unable to set [Exception processing
setting] in [Communication action].
Is [Insert] set for [Action type]?
(4) [Diagnosis] tab (
Symptom
• Set any other than [Insert] for [Action
type].
Section 6.10 Diagnosis)
Checked item
GT Designer2 cannot communicate with
Has Option OS (MES Interface) been
GOT.
installed?
(5) [Working log] tab (
Symptom
• Install Option OS (MES Interface) on the
Section 6.11 Working Log)
Checked item
Has Option OS (MES Interface) been
GOT.
installed?
5
Corrective action
• Install Option OS (MES Interface) on the
GOT.
Is there a CF card inserted?
No log is displayed.
Is the MES interface function operating?
• Install a CF card.
• Turn ON the CF card access switch.
• On the Diagnosis tab, check the MES
interface function status.
• Check if Adjust is enabled with the Utility
Is the time adjust function of the GOT
SNTP time synchronization setting.
disabled?
6
function of the GOT.
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
No execution result is displayed in spite of
3
4
Corrective action
GOT.
GT Designer2 cannot communicate with
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Is there any Select action set for the job?
SPECIFICATIONS
Unable to set [DB buffering setting].
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Symptom
OVERVIEW
Section 6.7 Job Settings)
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
(3) [Job settings] (
• Check if Adjust is enabled in GT
Designer2.
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
8.1 Error Handling and Recovery Method
8.1.1 MES Interface Function setting
8-4
8.1.2 When using DB Connection Service Setting Tool
This section explains troubleshooting information on the setting of DB Connection Service
Setting Tool.
Chapter 7 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL
Symptom
Checked item
Corrective action
• Terminate the already started DB
Unable to start DB Connection Service
Has DB Connection Service Setting Tool
Setting Tool.
been already started?
• Only one DB Connection Service Setting
Was a user ID having the administrator
• Log in again with a user ID having the
Connection Service Setting Tool.
Tool can be activated.
Unable to reflect the setting.
authority used for the login?
administrator authority.
• Uncheck the [limit IP addresses which
Unable to save the setting.
Is there no permitted IP address?
permit to connect] checkbox, or add an
IP address for which connection is
permitted.
Is the file set in [Output destination] read[Access log output error] is recorded in
[Event Viewer] of [Administrative Tools] in
Windows .
only?
Is the access to the folder containing the
file set in [Output destination] authorized?
Is the drive space of the server computer
full?
Is the file set in [Output destination] read-
[SQL failure log output error] is recorded in
[Event Viewer] of [Administrative Tools] in
Windows .
only?
Is the access to the folder containing the
file set in [Output destination] authorized?
Is the drive space of the server computer
full?
8-5
8.1 Error Handling and Recovery Method
8.1.2 When using DB Connection Service Setting Tool
• Correct the file specification.
• Check the right of access to the folder.
• Check the free space on the drive.
• Correct the file specification.
• Check the right of access to the folder.
• Check the free space on the drive.
1
OVERVIEW
8.2 Error Code List
The error code list is shown below.
For the error output checking method, refer to the following.
Section 8.1 Error Handling and Recovery Method
2
Error description and cause
Corrective action
• The device value cannot be collected.
Tag value collecting error
Check the device settings and the network
configuration.
3
• The set data are erroneous.
0x41140029
Setting read error
0x4114002A
Download them again.
• In the case of one-shot job execution, the CF
card may corrupted. Replace the CF card.
• Check the Ethernet connection.
• An Ethernet communication error has occurred.
0x4114002B
DB connection service communication error
• Check if [Server service settings] are correct.
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
• Check if the ODBC setting is correct.
Section 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
• The data cannot be converted to the specified
0x4114005F
Type conversion error
type.
• Change the setting so that type conversion will
be available in any case.
Tag write error
• Check if data can written to the device specified
Failed to perform the tag access.
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
for the tag component.
0x41140065
• Check if [Device tag settings] are correct.
Section 6.5 Device Tag Settings
• Failed to read data from the tag.
0x41140069
Tag value read error
4
5
• Failed to write data to the tag.
0x41140061
SPECIFICATIONS
0x41130001
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Error code
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
8.2.1 Error log in the Working log
• Check if [Device tag settings] are correct.
6
Section 6.5 Device Tag Settings
specified for the tag component.
• Change the setting so that type conversion will
be available in any case.
0x41140081
0x41140083
• Data stored in the DB buffer are invalid.
DB buffer content error
• The CF card may be corrupted.
• Replace the CF card.
• A part of invalid data in the DB buffer has been
0x41140084
Partial correction of DB buffer content
corrected.
• A part of the DB buffered data in the CF card
may have been corrupted.
• Failed to clear the DB buffer.
0x41140086
DB buffer clear error
7
• The CF card may be corrupted.
• Replace the CF card.
8
(To the next page)
8.2 Error Code List
8.2.1 Error log in the Working log
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Type conversion to tag component error
8-6
TROUBLESHOOTING
0x41140077
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
• The data could not be converted to the type
(From the previous page)
Error code
Error description and cause
Corrective action
• The DB buffer file is invalid.
0x41140087
DB buffer file error
• The CF card may be corrupted.
• Replace the CF card.
• Data stored in the DB buffer are invalid.
0x41140089
DB buffer content error
• The CF card may be corrupted.
• Replace the CF card.
• Because the DB buffer became full, the data
0x41140093
DB buffer full error
could not be stored in the DB buffer.
• Ensure the CF card capacity.
• Failed in file operation during DB buffering
0x41140099
DB buffering error
operation.
• Check the CF card, and if corrupted, replace it.
0x4114009F
DB buffer read error
0x411400A1
DB buffer clear error
0x411400A3
DB buffer read error
0x411400A5
DB buffer empty error
0x411400A6
DB buffer content error
0x411400B2
0x411400B6
0x411400BA
• Data in the DB buffer could not be read normally.
• Check the CF card, and if corrupted, replace it.
• Failed to clear the DB buffer.
• Check the CF card, and if corrupted, replace it.
• Data in the DB buffer could not be read normally.
• Check the CF card, and if corrupted, replace it.
• The DB buffer is empty.
• Check the CF card, and if corrupted, replace it.
• Data stored in the DB buffer are invalid.
• Check the CF card, and if corrupted, replace it.
• Character strings could not be converted to
Character string number conversion error
numerical values.
• Change the setting so that type conversion will
be available in any case.
0x411400C0
0x411400D0
Overflow or zero divide error
0x411400D2
Operation error
• Division by zero was attempted.
• Change the setting to avoid division by zero.
• Invalid operation was performed.
• Change the setting so that any invalid operation
will not performed.
• Check that the option OS for the logging function
0x411400D4
Logging function is not running.
for installed on the GOT.
• Check that the logging setting is configured.
0x411400D6
Invalid logging ID.
• The logging ID is invalid.
• Set the logging ID for the logging setting.
• The advanced system alarm setting is invalid.
0x411400DC
Advanced system alarm function is not available.
• Set the advanced system alarm observation
setting.
• The alarm ID is invalid.
0x411400E2
Invalid alarm ID.
• Set the alarm ID for the advanced user alarm
observation setting.
(To the next page)
8-7
8.2 Error Code List
8.2.1 Error log in the Working log
1
(From the previous page)
Corrective action
• The maximum number of obtained records is
0x411400E8
Invalid max number of select record.
invalid.
• Set the tag component value specified as the
maximum number of records 1 or more.
• Check that the option OS for the operation log
0x411400EA
Operation log function is not running
0x411400EE
Unable to find the operation log file.
0x411400F0
Unable to open the operation log file.
Unable to acquire the operation log file.
2
function is installed on the GOT.
• Check that the operation log setting is
configured.
0x411400F2
OVERVIEW
Error description and cause
• The MES interface function in the GOT cannot
access the operation log file.
• Check that the CF card including the operation
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Error code
3
log file is installed in the GOT.
• An error occurred in the Ethernet
0x41150110
Communication start error
• Check if [Server service settings] are correct.
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
• Check if the ODBC setting is correct.
Section 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
0x41150120
Communication connection error
0x41150121
Communication connection timeout
0x41150130
Message transmission error
0x41150131
Message transmission timeout
• An Ethernet communication error has occurred.
• Check the Ethernet connection.
• Check if [Server service settings] are correct.
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
• Check if the ODBC setting is correct.
Section 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
• An Ethernet communication error has occurred.
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
start.
• Check the Ethernet connection.
SPECIFICATIONS
communication, and the communication failed to
5
Message reception error
• Check if [Server Service setting] are correct.
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
• Check if the ODBC setting is correct.
Section 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
0x41150141
Message reception timeout
• Check the error information of DB Connection
Service (access log file).
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
• Check the Ethernet connection.
0x41150140
6
0x41150161
DB transaction start status error
0x41150162
DB transaction end status error
0x41150300
Unsupported DB Connection Service error
• Check the transaction status of the database.
• The connection to unsupported DB Connection
Service is failed.
Check the version of DB Connection Service.
• The connection to DB Connection Service with
0x41150301
Unsupported communication timeout setting
unsupported communication timeout is failed.
• Check the version of DB Connection Service.
• An Ethernet communication error has occurred.
• Check the Ethernet connection.
0x41151010
Database connection error
• Check if [Server service settings] are correct.
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
• Check if the ODBC setting is correct.
Section 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
(To the next page)
8.2 Error Code List
8.2.1 Error log in the Working log
8-8
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
DB transaction status error
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
0x41150160
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Section 7.8.1 Access log
(From the previous page)
Error code
Error description and cause
Corrective action
• An Ethernet communication error has occurred.
• Check the Ethernet connection.
0x41151110
Message reception error
• Check if [Server Service setting] are correct.
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
• Check if the ODBC setting is correct.
Section 7.2 Setting ODBC of Database
0x41151120
Received message data error
• Check the error information of DB Connection
Service (access log file).
Section 7.8.1 Access log
0x41151180
Waiting for DB access (program execution)
completion timeout
0x41151320
SELECT execution error
0x41151330
COMMIT execution error
0x41151340
ROLLBACK execution error
0x41151350
DB update error
0x41151410
SQL execution error
0x41151420
ODBC connection error during SQL execution
Service.
Check the server and the network.
• Check the sent SQL text and database contents.
• Check if the table and field settings are correct.
Section 6.8 Job Settings - Actions
• Check if the program specified with the program
0x41152005
0x41152006
• No response is received from DB Connection
Execution error (Program execution function)
execution function is executable with the
specified account.
• There is no execution file of the program that is
0x41152007
Specified program file not exist (Program execution
function)
specified for the program execution function.
• Check if the program specified with the program
execution function is executable with the
specified account.
• There are more than one execution file of the
program that is specified for the program
0x41152008
Specified program file duplicated (Program
execution function)
execution function.
• Check if the program specified with the program
execution function is executable with the
specified account.
0x41152009
to
• Check if the program specified with the program
Execution error (Program execution function)
0x41152014
8-9
8.2 Error Code List
8.2.1 Error log in the Working log
execution function is executable with the
specified account.
1
(1) Event log of Windows
(a) Event log output warning list of DB Connection Service (Source name:
DBConnector)
Error description and cause
Corrective action
• Configure the settings again with DB Connection
Start the service using the default setting.
Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB
Connection Service Setting Tool
(b) Event log output warning list of DB Connection Service (Source name:
DBConnector)
Error event ID
1
2
5
Error description and cause
Corrective action
Unable to start the service due to insufficient
memory.
Unable to start the service due to insufficient
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
resources.
Failed to read the setting file.
The service is stopped.
• Refer to the actions of error codes 101 to 129.
• Actions are displayed with error codes 101 to
6
The service is stopped.
and 501 to 503.
• Actions are displayed with error codes 401 to
403, and 501 to 503.
• Change the server port No. with DB Connection
9
The server port has already been opened.
Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB
The computer ran out of memory while reading the
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
setting file.
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
102
The setting file path is too long.
103
The setting file name indicates the directory.
104
The setting file could not be opened.
5
6
Service Setting Tool.
The service is stopped.
Connection Service Setting Tool
101
4
129.
• Refer to the actions of error codes 401 to 403,
Failed to initialize the log file.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service Setting Tool.
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
There is no setting file.
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
1
3
• Reinstall the DB Connection Service to the
directory whose path name is shorter.
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Warning event ID
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
The DB Connection Service outputs errors to the Windows Event Log, access log, and
SQL failure log.
For Windows Vista , DB Connection Service Client also outputs errors to Windows
Event Log.
OVERVIEW
8.2.2 DB Connection Service
7
• Reinstall the DB Connection Service.
setting again with DB Connection Service Setting
Description of the setting file is not correct.
Tool.
Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB
Connection Service Setting Tool
(To the next page)
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
105
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
• Terminate other applications, and make the
8.2 Error Code List
8.2.2 DB Connection Service
8 - 10
(From the previous page)
Error event ID
Error description and cause
108
The server port No. setting is not correct.
109
The server port No. setting is out of range.
110
The timeout time setting is not correct.
111
The timeout time setting is out of range.
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
401
402
Corrective action
There are too many connection-permitted IP
address settings.
Description of the connection-permitted IP address
setting is not correct.
The mask bit length setting of the connectionpermitted IP address is not correct.
The mask bit length setting of the connectionpermitted IP address is out of range.
The access log setting is not correct.
The setting of the access log file name is not
correct.
The access log file name is too long.
The maximum file size setting for the access log is
not correct.
• Configure the settings again with DB Connection
Service Setting Tool.
The maximum file size setting for the access log is
Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB
out of range.
Connection Service Setting Tool
The maximum number of access log files is not set
correctly.
The maximum number of access log files is out of
range.
The SQL failure log setting is not correct.
The setting of the SQL failure log file name is not
correct.
The SQL failure log file name is too long.
The maximum file size setting for the SQL failure
log is not correct.
The maximum file size setting for the SQL failure
log is out of range.
The maximum number of SQL failure log files is not
set correctly.
The maximum number of SQL failure log files is out
of range.
The computer ran out of memory when initializing
the access log file.
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
The computer ran out of resources when initializing
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
the access log file.
• Shorten the path to the access log file with DB
403
The full path name of the access log file is too long.
Connection Service Setting Tool.
Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB
Connection Service Setting Tool
(To the next page)
8 - 11
8.2 Error Code List
8.2.2 DB Connection Service
1
(From the previous page)
Corrective action
• If no directory exists for storing the access log
file, create it.
• When the attribute of the access log file is set to
read-only, cancel the setting.
• If read/write is disabled for the access log file,
• When the access log file name represents a
directory, rename or delete the directory.
• When the access log file has been open in
another application, terminate the application.
• Check the disk device for any fault.
• When the disk space is full, ensure a free disk
space.
405
The log could not be written to the access log file.
another application, terminate the application.
• When the attribute of the oldest access log file is
set to read-only, cancel the setting.
• If read/write is disabled for the oldest access log
Failed to delete an old access log file.
file, enable it in the security setting.
• When the oldest access log file has been open in
another application, terminate the application.
• Check the disk device for any fault.
• When the attributes of the new and old access
log files are set to read-only, cancel the setting.
• If read/write is disabled for the new and old
407
Failed to rename the access log file.
3
• When the access log file has been open in
• Check the disk device for any fault.
406
2
enable it in the security setting.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
The access log file could not be opened.
access log files, enable it in the security setting.
• When the new and old access log files have
SPECIFICATIONS
404
OVERVIEW
Error description and cause
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Error event ID
5
application.
• Check the disk device for any fault.
501
502
The computer ran out of memory when initializing
the SQL failure log file.
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
The computer ran out of resources when initializing
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
the SQL failure log file.
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
been open in another application, terminate the
6
503
The full path name of the SQL failure log file is too
long.
DB Connection Service Setting Tool.
Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB
Connection Service Setting Tool
• If no directory exists for storing the SQL failure
log file, create it.
• When the attribute of the SQL failure log file is
set to read-only, cancel the setting.
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
• Shorten the path to the SQL failure log file with
7
file, enable it in the security setting.
• When the SQL failure log file name represents a
directory, rename or delete the directory.
• When the SQL failure log file has been open in
another application, terminate the application.
• Check the disk device for any fault.
(To the next page)
8.2 Error Code List
8.2.2 DB Connection Service
8 - 12
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
The SQL failure log file could not be opened.
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
• If read/write is disabled for the SQL failure log
504
(From the previous page)
Error event ID
Error description and cause
Corrective action
• When the disk space is full, ensure a free disk
505
The log could not be written to the SQL failure log
file.
space.
• When the SQL failure log file has been open in
another application, terminate the application.
• Check the disk device for any fault.
• When the attribute of the oldest SQL failure log
file is set to read-only, cancel the setting.
• If read/write is disabled for the oldest SQL failure
506
Failed to delete an old SQL failure log file.
log file, enable it in the security setting.
• When the oldest SQL failure log file has been
open in another application, terminate the
application.
• Check the disk device for any fault.
• When the attributes of the new and old SQL
failure log files are set to read-only, cancel the
setting.
• If read/write is disabled for the new and old SQL
507
Failed to rename the SQL failure log file.
failure log files, enable it in the security setting.
• When the new and old SQL failure log files have
been open in another application, terminate the
application.
• Check the disk device for any fault.
(c) Event log output error list of DB Connection Service Client (source name:
DBCnctClient)
Error code
Error description and cause
Corrective action
50
51
52
Unable to start DB Connection Service Client.
53
8 - 13
8.2 Error Code List
8.2.2 DB Connection Service
• Terminate unnecessary applications.
• Add more memory to the computer.
1
(2) Access log of DB Connection Service
Error description and cause
Corrective action
OVERVIEW
Error code
(Service Not Start.)
memory.
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
(Service Not Start.)
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
resources.
Failed to start the service due to failure of the
server port initialization.
• If a firewall software has been installed, make the
specified server port operational.
• Terminate the application that has opened the
server port.
0x20100012
(Service Not Start.)
Another application has opened the server port.
• Set another server port No. with DB Connection
Service Setting Tool.
Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB
Connection Service Setting Tool
(Not Initialize a service for each client: [IP address])
0x20200001
Failed to initialize a service for each client due to
insufficient memory.
(Deny network connection request from [IP
0x20200002
address])
Rejected the connection request from the nonpermitted IP address.
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP
0x20300001
address])
Failed to receive data due to insufficient memory.
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
• Using DB Connection Service Setting Tool, add
the IP address to those with connection
permission.
Section 7.5 Setting Items of DB
Connection Service Setting Tool
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Failed to start the service due to insufficient
(Service Not Start.)
0x20100011
2
3
SPECIFICATIONS
0x20100002
Failed to start the service due to insufficient
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
0x20100001
5
address])
Connection disconnected during request reception.
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP
address])
Timed out during request reception.
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP
0x20300012
address])
Detected failure of the MES interface module while
• Check if it is connected to the network.
• Check if the gateway and/or hub is operating.
• Check if the power of the GOT has not been
turned off.
waiting for or receiving a request.
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP
0x20300013
address])
Receive I/O error
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP
address])
Buffer overrun (Request length exceeded)
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP
0x20300015
address])
7
• Check the source IP address setting.
• Confirm the version of the Option OS (MES
Interface).
Received an invalid request.
(To the next page)
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
0x20300014
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
0x20300011
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
0x20300010
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP
8.2 Error Code List
8.2.2 DB Connection Service
8 - 14
(From the previous page)
Error code
Error description and cause
Corrective action
(SID [Session ID]: Response Transmit Error: [IP
0x20310010
address])
Failed to transmit a response due to disconnection.
(SID [Session ID]: Response Transmit Error: [IP
0x20310011
address])
Timed out during response transmission.
(SID [Session ID]: Response Transmit Error: [IP
0x20310012
address])
Detected failure of the MES interface module
• Check if it is connected to the network.
• Check if the gateway and/or hub is operating.
• Check if the power of the GOT has not been
turned off.
during response transmission.
(SID [Session ID]: Response Transmit Error: [IP
0x20310013
address])
Send I/O error
(SID [Session ID]: DB Connect: [Data source]:
0x20400001
[User]: Failed)
Failed in DB connection due to insufficient memory.
(SID [Session ID]: DB Connect: [Data source]:
0x20400002
[User]: Failed)
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
Failed in DB connection due to insufficient
resources.
0x20400010
(SID [Session ID]: DB Connect: [Data source]:
• Check the source IP address setting.
[User]: Failed)
• Confirm the version of the option OS (MES
Invalid DB connection request
(SID [Session ID]: DB Connect: [Data source]:
0x20400020
[User]: Failed)
Failed to create a DB handle.
Interface).
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
• Set correct data source name, user name, and
password in [Server service settings] of [MES
(SID [Session ID]: DB Connect: [Data source]:
0x20400022
[User]: Failed)
Failed in DB connection.
interface setting].
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
• Check if the personal computer is restarted after
the database is installed. Restart the personal
computer if not restarted.
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)
0x20600001
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)
Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient memory.
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)
0x20600002
(SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)
Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient
resources.
(To the next page)
8 - 15
8.2 Error Code List
8.2.2 DB Connection Service
1
(From the previous page)
Error description and cause
Corrective action
OVERVIEW
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)
0x20600010
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
2
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)
Invalid SQL execution request
• Check the source IP address setting.
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)
• Confirm the version of the option OS (MES
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)
Interface).
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)
0x20600020
(SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Error code
3
DB Connection Service does not support the SQL
instruction to be executed.
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
setting], a table name in the job for the
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)
communication action setting, or the resource
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)
data send action setting in [MES Interface].
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
(SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)
Failed to obtain the number of fields in the record
that is to be obtained by the SQL execution.
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)
0x20600023
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)
Failed in SQL execution.
0x20600025
setting], a table name, field names, Select/
stored in the fields in the job for the
communication action setting or the resource
data send action setting in [MES Interface].
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
• In [MES interface setting], set update conditions
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)
correctly for the Communication action setting of
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)
the Job settings.
(SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
No record was updated or inserted by the SQL
execution.
(SID [Session ID]: *** Transmitting Commit
Success Response Failed. ***)
Failed to transmit the COMMIT success response.
Section 6.8.1 Setting items in
Communication action
• Check if the database has been filled with
registered data.
• Check if it is connected to the network.
• Check if the gateway and/or hub is operating.
• Check if the power of the GOT has not been
0x20700002
Failed in remote execution due to insufficient
memory.
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed)
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
Failed in remote execution due to insufficient
(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed)
Invalid remote execution request
7
8
resources.
0x20700010
6
turned off.
(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed)
0x20700001
5
Update conditions, and types of the data to be
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)
0x2060002B
• Correctly set a database type for [DB server
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)
4
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)
0x20600022
• Correctly set a database type for [DB server
Failed in preparation before SQL execution.
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)
• Check the source IP address setting.
• Confirm the version of the option OS (MES
Interface).
(To the next page)
8.2 Error Code List
8.2.2 DB Connection Service
8 - 16
TROUBLESHOOTING
0x20600021
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)
SPECIFICATIONS
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)
(From the previous page)
Error code
Error description and cause
Corrective action
• In [MES interface setting], set correct user name
and password for the application server setting.
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
• Check if the user account is invalid or not by
0x20700020
(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed)
Failed to log on in remote execution.
Administrative Tools of Windows .
• Check if the setting is forcing the user to enter
password at next logon by Administrative Tools
of Windows .
• Check if the user password is expired or not by
Administrative Tools of Windows .
• No user profile for Windows
0x20700021
(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed)
Failed to load user profile during remote execution.
has been created.
• Confirm that the user ID set for the application
server setting of the MES interface setting can be
used to log on Windows , and reexecute.
• Check if the application to be executed in remote
(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed)
0x20700023
Failed to generate process during remote
execution.
execution exists or not.
• Check if the name of the application to be
executed in remote execution is a directory.
• Make a proper security setting for the application
to be executed in remote execution.
(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed)
0x20700024
Timeout or aborted of waiting to complete remote
execution.
0x20800010
DB Connection Service Setting Tool.
• Exit the application for the remote execution
before logging off.
(SID [Session ID]: TCPOpen Request Error: [IP
• Check the source IP address setting.
address])
• Confirm the version of the option OS (MES
Invalid TCPOpen request
8 - 17
• Set the longer time to the DB access timeout for
8.2 Error Code List
8.2.2 DB Connection Service
Interface).
1
0x20600020
0x20600021
Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient
resources.
DB Connection Service does not support the SQL
instruction to be executed.
Failed in preparation before SQL execution.
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
• Check the source IP address setting.
• Confirm the version of the option OS (MES
Interface).
• Correctly set a database type for [DB server
setting], a table name in the job for the
communication action setting, or the resource
0x20600022
Failed to obtain the number of fields in the record
that is to be obtained by the SQL execution.
data send action setting in [MES Interface].
setting], a table name, field names, Select/
Update conditions, and types of the data to be
Failed in SQL execution.
stored in the fields in the job for the
communication action setting or the resource
data send action setting in [MES Interface].
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
• In [MES interface setting], set update conditions
correctly for the Communication action setting of
0x20600025
No record was updated or inserted by the SQL
execution.
3
Section 6.6 Server Service Settings
• Correctly set a database type for [DB server
0x20600023
2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
0x20600002
Corrective action
the Job settings.
SPECIFICATIONS
Error description and cause
Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient memory.
4
SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES
BEFORE USE OF THE MES
INTERFACE FUNCTION
Error code
0x20600001
OVERVIEW
(3) SQL failure log of DB Connection Service
5
Section 6.8.1 Setting items in
Communication action
registered data.
• Check if the power of the GOT has not been
turned off.
6
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION SETTING
Failed to transmit the COMMIT success response.
• Check if the gateway and/or hub is operating.
7
DB CONNECTION
SERVICE AND
SETTING TOOL
Success Response Failed. ***)
8
TROUBLESHOOTING
(Data source name: *** Transmitting Commit
0x2060002B
• Check if it is connected to the network.
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION
• Check if the database has been filled with
8.2 Error Code List
8.2.2 DB Connection Service
8 - 18
APPENDICES
Appendix 1 Usable Characters and ASCII Code Tables by Setting
Items
Appendix 1.1 ASCII code table
App - 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
(SP)
0
@
1
!
1
A
P
`
p
Q
a
2
[
2
B
R
b
q
r
3
#
3
C
S
c
s
4
$
4
D
T
d
t
5
%
5
E
U
e
u
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
7
‘
7
G
W
g
w
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
C
,
<
L
\
l
|
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
F
/
?
O
_
o
(1) ASCII characters
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
(SP)
0
@
P
`
p
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
2
[
2
B
R
b
r
3
#
3
C
S
c
s
4
$
4
D
T
d
t
5
%
5
E
U
e
u
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
7
Åe
7
G
W
g
w
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
C
,
<
L
\
l
|
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
F
/
?
O
_
o
INDEX
The shaded characters can be used.
(However, neither a number nor an underscore ( _ ) can be used as the first
character.)
(2) Reserved terms
The following words are reserved terms and therefore cannot be used.
Reserved terms
A
abstract
B
boolean, break, byte
C
case, catch, char, class, const, continue
D
DATETIME, debugger, default, delete, do, double
E
else, enum, event, exit, export, extends
F
false, final, finally, float, for, function
G
goto
I
if, implements, import, in, include, Infinity, instanceof, in, interface, invoke
L
long
N
NaN, native, new, null
O
oneshot
P
package, private, protected, public
R
return
S
short, static, super, switch, synchronized, SYSTEM
T
this, throw, throws, trace, transient, true, try, typeof
U
undefined
V
var, void, volatile
W
while, with
APPENDICES
Appendix 1.2 Characters applicable to item names, component names, variable names, etc.
App - 2
Appendix 1.3 Characters applicable to character string constants, etc.
The shaded characters can be used.
2
3
4
5
6
0
(SP)
0
@
P
`
7
p
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
2
[
2
B
R
b
r
3
#
3
C
S
c
s
4
$
4
D
T
d
t
5
%
5
E
U
e
u
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
7
‘
7
G
W
g
w
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
C
,
<
L
\
l
|
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
F
/
?
O
_
o
Appendix 1.4 Characters applicable to field names, table names, etc.
The shaded characters can be used.
(However, a number cannot be used as the first character.)
App - 3
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
(SP)
0
@
P
`
p
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
2
[
2
B
R
b
r
3
#
3
C
S
c
s
4
$
4
D
T
d
t
5
%
5
E
U
e
u
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
7
‘
7
G
W
g
w
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
9
)
9
I
Y
I
y
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
C
,
<
L
\
l
|
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
F
/
?
O
_
o
Depending on the number of set jobs or the trigger condition setting, the monitoring
interval timeout may be generated in the MES interface function.
This section explains monitoring interval timeout.
APPENDICES
Appendix 2 About Monitoring Interval Timeout
Although up to 64 jobs can be registered and trigger conditions can be set to each
of them, some adjustment in trigger condition settings is required depending on
the number of the jobs.
(1) Monitoring interval timeout
The monitoring interval timeout means that the trigger detection time (the time
provided for the trigger monitoring function to determine if the trigger conditions are
met) becomes longer than the time limit of trigger occurrence (monitoring interval).
When a monitoring interval timeout occurs, the job may not be executed even though
set trigger conditions are met.
Monitoring interval: 1s
10:08:30
10:08:31
10:08:32
10:08:33
10:08:34
10:08:35
Detecting
trigger
Detecting
trigger
Monitoring timeout
occurred
Detecting
trigger
Detecting
trigger
Job
execution
Detecting
trigger
Job
execution
Job
execution
Job
execution
(2) Causes of monitoring interval timeout
A monitoring interval timeout occurs when the total jobs cannot be processed in a
monitoring interval.
The monitoring interval includes the following sampling intervals.
• Sampling interval set for [Sampling setting] in [Device tag settings] when
selecting [Value monitoring startup] or [Handshake operation] for [Trigger
conditions] in [Job settings]
Section 6.5 Device Tag Settings
• Sampling interval set for [Trigger conditions] when selecting [Specified time
period startup] for [Trigger conditions] in [Job settings]
Section 6.7.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
Remark
In the following cases, monitoring interval timeouts do not occur.
• When selecting [Time specification startup] or [GOT Initializing] for [Trigger conditions] in [Job settings]
• When the total jobs are processed in a monitoring interval
App - 4
INDEX
Point
(Example 1)
When the time for trigger detection is shorter than the monitoring interval
Since processing for trigger detection is performed within each monitoring
interval, no monitoring interval timeout occurs.
Monitoring
interval
Detecting trigger
(Example 2)
When the time for trigger detection is longer than the monitoring interval
Since processing for trigger detection cannot be completed within each monitoring
interval, monitoring interval timeout occurs.
The processing for trigger detection is performed at the next timing after the
monitoring interval.
Monitoring
interval
Detecting trigger
Monitoring interval
timeout occurred.
Point
If the monitoring interval timeout has occurred, set a monitoring interval longer
than the processing time described in This section (4) in each of all jobs.
(3) How to check the monitoring interval timeout
The monitoring interval timeout can be checked in the Monitoring interval timeout
count area (GS275).
For the Monitoring interval timeout count area, refer to the following.
Section 3.4.2 (3) Monitoring interval timeout count (GS275)
App - 5
(Example 3)
Processing time for trigger detection, which is required for [Job settings] shown
below
Since the number of trigger conditions is 12, the assumed processing time for
trigger detection is: 12 100 = 1200 (ms)
Setting a value of 1200ms or longer to the monitoring interval in all jobs can
prevent occurrence of the monitoring interval timeout.
Job name
Trigger conditions [Trigger 1]
Trigger conditions [Trigger 2]
Job 1
[Value monitoring startup]
[Value monitoring startup]
Job 2
[Value monitoring startup]
[Value monitoring startup]
Job 3
[Handshake operation]
-
Job 4
[Specified time period startup]
-
Job 5
[Time specification startup]
-
Job 6
[Value monitoring startup]
[Value monitoring startup]
Job 7
[Handshake operation]
-
App - 6
INDEX
Total number of trigger conditions 100 (ms) can be assumed as a processing time
for trigger detection.
Total number of trigger conditions is the total of those set for individual jobs.
Note that [Trigger 1] and [Trigger 2] are counted separately.
Also, [Handshake operation] must be counted as "2" for each.
APPENDICES
(4) Processing time for trigger detection
Appendix 3 Warning Messages in Windows Vista(R)
Appendix 3.1 Overview of warning messages
In Windows Vista , a User Account Control feature has been added.
When installing/uninstalling GT Works2 or GT Designer2, or starting [DB Connection
Service Setting Tool], a warning message is displayed.
Appendix 3.2 Methods for disabling warning messages
Point
The User Account Control (UAC) is provided to protect the system from being
destroyed (e.g. prevention of start-up of a program which will execute an
unintended operation).
Before taking either of the methods described below, understand that the security
function offered by UAC will be disabled and consider the risk.
The following two methods are available for preventing warning messages.
(1) Disabling the User Account Control function
The following shows a procedure for disabling the User Account Control function.
1
(To the next page)
App - 7
Select [Start] - [Control Panel].
APPENDICES
(From the previous page)
Select [User Accounts].
3
Select [User Accounts].
4
Select [Turn User Account Control on or off].
When User Account Control is enabled in
INDEX
2
Windows Vista , the following screen appears.
Click the Continue button.
(To the next page)
App - 8
(From the previous page)
5
(End)
App - 9
Deselect [Turn on User Account Control (UAC) to
make your computer more secure].
The following shows a procedure for permitting programs without any warning
message.
Select [Start] - [Control Panel].
2
Select [Classic View].
3
Select [Administrative Tools].
INDEX
1
APPENDICES
(2) Method for permitting programs without any warning message
(To the next page)
App - 10
(From the previous page)
4
Select [Local Security Policy].
When User Account Control is enabled in
Windows Vista , the following screen appears.
Click the Continue button.
(To the next page)
App - 11
5
Select [Local Policies].
6
Select [Security Options].
Select [User Account Control: Behavior of the
elevation prompt for administrators in Admin
Approval Mode, Prompt for consent].
8
Select [Elevate without prompting] on the [Local
INDEX
7
APPENDICES
(From the previous page)
Security Setting] tab, and click the
OK
button.
(End)
App - 12
Appendix 4 Tables for Used Terms
In GT Designer2, some different terms are used for the same meaning on the MES
interface function setting screen and other setting screens.
They are listed in the tables shown below.
(1) In the case of Device tag settings
MES interface function setting
Others
Signed Decimal (Data length: 16 bits)
Single word
Signed BIN
Signed BIN16
Signed Decimal (Data length: 32 bits)
Double word
Signed BIN32
Real number
Real
String
ASCII Display
bytes
Digits
(2) In the case of Job settings
MES interface function setting
Specified time period startup
Value monitoring startup
Others
Sampling
Rise
Fall
=
==
<-
=
Variable
temporary works
!=
App - 13
Database
<Server computer>
IP address: 192.168.11.1
Ethernet
<GOT>
IP address: 192.168.11.101
Engineering process
Process line
App - 14
INDEX
The following is an example of the system where the MES interface function is used.
Example) A system where manufacturing information is collected in a GOT and managed
in a database
In the company-wide integrated system in which parts acceptance, manufacturing
processing, assembly, shipment, and inventory control are managed, information of the
actual performance is managed in a database using the MES interface function.
A process line control PLC handles information on process line (equipment) stop, running
time, down time, quantity of production, and the number of rejected products.
On the GOT, the status of each process line is displayed, allowing control by operators.
By the MES interface function, the termination time of the process line, regularly-checked
operation rate, and fraction defective information are managed.
The system configuration is illustrated below.
APPENDICES
Appendix 5 Application Example of MES Interface Function
(1) Setup on the server computer (database)
The actual performance for every 5 seconds, and fraction defective and operation rate
for every hour are managed using the database.
(a) Table setting
• Table name: PROCESS
• Field:
Name
Data type
Size
Scale
NULL
DATETIME
CHAR
32
PERFORMANCE
NUMBER
10
0
Possible
REJECT
NUMBER
10
1
Possible
WORKINGRATE
NUMBER
10
1
Possible
Default
Possible
• ODBC setting
ODBC data source name: PROCESS
Driver: OracleHome2
TNS service name: PROCESS
• DB Connection Service setting
Service port No.: 5112
Timeout: 10 seconds
(2) Setup on the configuration computer (GT Designer2)
(a) IP address setting
• Communication Settings
Extend I/F-1: 1
CH No.: *
Driver: Ethernet Download
• Detailed setting
IP address: 192.168.11.101
Ethernet Download: 5014
Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
(b) Script
No.
1
2
Trigger
During M101=ON
When M102 rises
Operation
Remarks
[w:GD540]=[w:D540];
M101: Operation stop flag
[w:GD542]=[w:D542];
D540: Operation time
[b:M101]=0;
D542: Accumulated down time
[w:GD544]=[w:D544];
M102: Completion notification
[w:GD546]=[w:D546];
(The GOT collects PLC
[b:GB102]=[b:M102];
information upon completion of
[b:M102]=0;
the processing.)
(c) Screen design
For how to create the screens, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version
App - 15
Screen Design Manual
Sampling cycle
Component name
Operation time
Accumulated down
time
Normal sampling
5 seconds
Sync. trigger
5 seconds
Data type
Device
Single word
GD540
Single word
GD542
Performance
Single word
GD544
Rejected
Single word
GD546
Fraction defective
Real number
GD548
WorkingRate
Real number
GD550
Stop flag
Bit
GB101
INDEX
Device tag name
• Server service settings
Service name
Type
DBServer
IP address/Port No.
Database server
192.168.11.1
• Job settings
Job name
Trigger
Startup
Status report
Processing
Remarks
Startup
• Initializing tags
Value monitoring
• Inserting the time and performance
GB102=ON
data into the database (DBServer)
Calculation of the
operation rate
• Calculating fraction defective from the
actual performance and the number of
rejected products
Specified time
Regular report
• Temporary variables
• Calculating the operation rate from the
F_DEFECT:
period
operation time and the accumulated
Fraction defective
1 hour
down time
OPERAT_R:
• Inserting the time, operation rate and
Operation rate
fraction defective into the database
(DBServer)
(3) Operation results
The operation results (database data) of the above system are as follows:
DATETIME
PERFORMANCE
2006/3/2 10:12:01
1
2006/3/2 10:24:32
2
2006/3/2 10:53:17
3
2006/3/2 11:00:00
2006/3/2 11:05:42
REJECT
WORKINGRATE
0
87.35
:
:
4
2006/3/2 11:17:31
5
:
:
APPENDICES
(d) MES interface setting
• Device tag settings
App - 16
Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by MES Interface Function Version Upgrade
(1) Added function
The following describes the function added by the MES interface function.
Item
GT Designer2
Description
version
OS version
Option OS
Allows to not collect device data.
2.47Z
MES Interface
[03.02.**]
Tag function
Option OS
Allows to set the array setting for tags.
2.73B
MES Interface
[03.09.**]
Oracle
8i, MSDE2000, Access2000, and Access2003 are
added as available database.
SQL text transmission
Industrial SQL Server 9.0 and Microsoft
Option OS
2.47Z
MES Interface
[03.02.**]
SQL Server 2005 are
added as an applicable database.
Option OS
2.58L
MES Interface
[03.03.**]
Option OS
Access 2007 is added as an applicable database.
2.82L
MES Interface
[03.13.**]
Trigger buffering function
Resource data send
function
Buffers the trigger activated during execution of a job, and
execute the action with the buffered data.
Option OS
2.47Z
MES Interface
[03.02.**]
Option OS
Sends the resource data collected in the GOT to the database.
2.82L
MES Interface
[03.13.**]
Option OS
Applicable model
GT16, GT16-MESB
2.90U
MES Interface
[04.02.**]
App - 17
INDEX
APPENDICES
Memo
App - 18
INDEX
[A]
Access log ............................................. 7-3,7-18,7-23
Account................................................................ A-15
Action...........................................................A-15,6-42
Application server computer ................................ A-15
Arithmetic processing function (Operation action)
..................................................................... 5-10,6-68
[C]
String ................................................................... 6-13
COMMIT .............................................................. A-15
Component setting .............................................. 6-11
Configuration computer ....................................... A-15
Constant ...................................................... 6-56,6-70
[D]
DB buffering......................................................... A-16
Clear processing ...................................... 6-90,6-98
Function ........................................................... 5-15
Manual resend processing ....................... 6-89,6-98
Operation ......................................................... 6-98
Setting ...................................................... 6-38,6-88
DB Connection Service ................................... 1-7,7-1
DB Connection Service Setting Tool ....... 1-7,7-1,7-15
DB interface function ....................................... 3-4,5-1
DB server function ................................................. 3-4
Device tag (Tag) ......................................A-16,5-3,6-6
Diagnosis ............................................................. 6-92
Operation ......................................................... 6-94
Status (MES interface function) ....................... 6-93
Change job status ............................................ 6-95
Connection result of previous job execution .... 6-97
DB buffering operation ..................................... 6-98
Diagnostics ............................................................ 3-4
[J]
Job ................................................ A-15,5-1,6-21,6-42
Job cancellation ................................................... 6-39
[M]
MES .....................................................................A-15
MES interface function setting ............................... 6-1
Monitoring interval timeout...........................3-7,App-4
[O]
ODBC ..................................................... A-15,7-2,7-4
One-shot execution.............................................. 6-40
Operating environment .......................................... 2-8
Configuration computer ...................................... 2-8
Server computer (SNTP server computer)......... 2-9
Operations using the Edit items tree...................... 6-3
Adding an item ................................................... 6-3
Deleting an item ................................................. 6-4
Replicating an item............................................. 6-4
Selecting an item................................................ 6-3
Option OS (MES interface) .................................... 1-7
Option setting....................................................... 6-85
[P]
Performance specifications.................................... 3-1
Program execution function ...................5-14,6-35,7-3
[R]
Record .................................................................A-16
Resource data send function (Resource data send
action) .......................................................... 5-11,6-72
Rollback ...............................................................A-16
[S]
[F]
Field ..................................................................... A-16
Function list and setting item list............................ 3-4
List of setting items of DB Connection Service
Setting Tool ........................................................ 3-5
List of the MES interface setting items............... 3-5
MES interface function list.................................. 3-4
[G]
GOT internal device......................................... 3-3,3-6
[H]
Handshake ..................................................A-16,6-33
[I]
IP filter ........................................................... 7-3,7-17
Index - 1
Select/Update conditions ..................................... 6-58
Server computer ..................................................A-15
Server service ......................................................A-15
Setting items in Array setting ................................. 6-9
Setting ODBC of a database ................................. 7-4
Setting tab.............................................................. 6-5
Device tag settings ............................................. 6-6
Job settings ...................................................... 6-21
Job settings - Actions ....................................... 6-42
Server service settings ..................................... 6-17
SNTP ...........................................................A-15,6-86
SNTP server computer ........................................A-15
SNTP time synchronization function .................... 5-23
SQL......................................................................A-15
SQL failure log .......................................7-3,7-19,7-25
SQL text transmission (Communication action)
....................................................................... 5-9,6-46
Insert ................................................................ 6-51
MultiSelect........................................................ 6-53
Select ............................................................... 6-49
Update ............................................................. 6-50
Statistical processing........................................... 6-14
APPENDICES
[T]
INDEX
Tag component (Component).............................. A-16
Tag for Wonderware Historian............................. A-15
Tag function............................................... 3-4,5-3,6-6
Test mode............................................................ 6-25
Time zone....................................................A-16,6-86
Transaction.......................................................... A-16
Trigger buffering .................................................. A-16
Function ....................................................... 3-4,5-6
Settings ............................................................ 6-26
Trigger conditions ........................................A-16,6-26
Trigger monitoring function.............................. 3-4,5-4
[V]
Variable (Temporary variable) .............A-16,6-57,6-70
[W]
Working log........................................................ 6-100
Working log tab
Job Execute Log ............................................ 6-102
MESInterface Execute Log ............................ 6-101
Index - 2
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co., Ltd. in the United States.
MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA.
Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
SH(NA)-080654ENG-H
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
HEADQUARTERS
EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES
EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
EUROPE
German Branch
Gothaer Straße 8
D-40880 Ratingen
Phone: +49 (0)2102 / 486-0
Fax: +49 (0)2102 / 486-1120
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. CZECH REPUBLIC
Czech Branch
Radlická 714/113a
CZ-158 00 Praha 5
Phone: +420 (0)251 551 470
Fax: +420 (0)251-551-471
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
FRANCE
French Branch
25, Boulevard des Bouvets
F-92741 Nanterre Cedex
Phone: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 55 68
Fax: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 57 57
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
IRELAND
Irish Branch
Westgate Business Park, Ballymount
IRL-Dublin 24
Phone: +353 (0)1 4198800
Fax: +353 (0)1 4198890
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
ITALY
Italian Branch
Viale Colleoni 7
I-20041 Agrate Brianza (MI)
Phone: +39 039 / 60 53 1
Fax: +39 039 / 60 53 312
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
SPAIN
Spanish Branch
Carretera de Rubí 76-80
E-08190 Sant Cugat del Vallés (Barcelona)
Phone: 902 131121 // +34 935653131
Fax: +34 935891579
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
UK
UK Branch
Travellers Lane
UK-Hatfield, Herts. AL10 8XB
Phone: +44 (0)1707 / 27 61 00
Fax: +44 (0)1707 / 27 86 95
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
JAPAN
Office Tower “Z” 14 F
8-12,1 chome, Harumi Chuo-Ku
Tokyo 104-6212
Phone: +81 3 622 160 60
Fax: +81 3 622 160 75
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION, Inc.
USA
500 Corporate Woods Parkway
Vernon Hills, IL 60061
Phone: +1 847 478 21 00
Fax: +1 847 478 22 53
GEVA
AUSTRIA
Wiener Straße 89
AT-2500 Baden
Phone: +43 (0)2252 / 85 55 20
Fax: +43 (0)2252 / 488 60
TEHNIKON
BELARUS
Oktyabrskaya 16/5, Off. 703-711
BY-220030 Minsk
Phone: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26
Fax: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26
Koning & Hartman b.v.
BELGIUM
Woluwelaan 31
BE-1800 Vilvoorde
Phone: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 40
Fax: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 49
INEA BH d.o.o.
BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA
Aleja Lipa 56
BA-71000 Sarajevo
Phone: +387 (0)33 / 921 164
Fax: +387 (0)33/ 524 539
AKHNATON
BULGARIA
4 Andrej Ljapchev Blvd. Pb 21
BG-1756 Sofia
Phone: +359 (0)2 / 817 6004
Fax: +359 (0)2 / 97 44 06 1
INEA CR d.o.o.
CROATIA
Losinjska 4 a
HR-10000 Zagreb
Phone: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 01/ -02/ -03
Fax: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 03
AutoCont C.S. s.r.o.
CZECH REPUBLIC
Technologická 374/6
CZ-708 00 Ostrava-Pustkovec
Phone: +420 595 691 150
Fax: +420 595 691 199
B:TECH A.S.
CZECH REPUBLIC
U Borové 69
CZ-58001 Havlíčkův Brod
Phone: +420 (0)569 777 777
Fax: +420 (0)569-777 778
Beijer Electronics A/S
DENMARK
Lykkegårdsvej 17, 1.
DK-4000 Roskilde
Phone: +45 (0)46/ 75 76 66
Fax: +45 (0)46 / 75 56 26
Beijer Electronics Eesti OÜ
ESTONIA
Pärnu mnt.160i
EE-11317 Tallinn
Phone: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 40
Fax: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 49
Beijer Electronics OY
FINLAND
Jaakonkatu 2
FIN-01620 Vantaa
Phone: +358 (0)207 / 463 500
Fax: +358 (0)207 / 463 501
UTECO A.B.E.E.
GREECE
5, Mavrogenous Str.
GR-18542 Piraeus
Phone: +30 211 / 1206 900
Fax: +30 211 / 1206 999
MELTRADE Ltd.
HUNGARY
Fertő utca 14.
HU-1107 Budapest
Phone: +36 (0)1 / 431-9726
Fax: +36 (0)1 / 431-9727
Beijer Electronics SIA
LATVIA
Vestienas iela 2
LV-1035 Riga
Phone: +371 (0)784 / 2280
Fax: +371 (0)784 / 2281
Beijer Electronics UAB
LITHUANIA
Savanoriu Pr. 187
LT-02300 Vilnius
Phone: +370 (0)5 / 232 3101
Fax: +370 (0)5 / 232 2980
INTEHSIS srl
MOLDOVA
bld. Traian 23/1
MD-2060 Kishinev
Phone: +373 (0)22 / 66 4242
Fax: +373 (0)22 / 66 4280
Koning & Hartman b.v.
NETHERLANDS
Haarlerbergweg 21-23
NL-1101 CH Amsterdam
Phone: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 00
Fax: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 05
Beijer Electronics AS
NORWAY
Postboks 487
NO-3002 Drammen
Phone: +47 (0)32 / 24 30 00
Fax: +47 (0)32 / 84 85 77
MPL Technology Sp. z o.o.
POLAND
Ul. Krakowska 50
PL-32-083 Balice
Phone: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 00
Fax: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 01
Sirius Trading & Services srl
ROMANIA
Aleea Lacul Morii Nr. 3
RO-060841 Bucuresti, Sector 6
Phone: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 06
Fax: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 02
Craft Con. & Engineering d.o.o.
SERBIA
Bulevar Svetog Cara Konstantina 80-86
SER-18106 Nis
Phone:+381 (0)18 / 292-24-4/5
Fax: +381 (0)18 / 292-24-4/5
INEA SR d.o.o.
SERBIA
Izletnicka 10
SER-113000 Smederevo
Phone: +381 (0)26 / 617 163
Fax: +381 (0)26 / 617 163
AutoCont Control s.r.o.
SLOVAKIA
Radlinského 47
SK-02601 Dolny Kubin
Phone: +421 (0)43 / 5868210
Fax: +421 (0)43 / 5868210
CS MTrade Slovensko, s.r.o.
SLOVAKIA
Vajanskeho 58
SK-92101 Piestany
Phone: +421 (0)33 / 7742 760
Fax: +421 (0)33 / 7735 144
INEA d.o.o.
SLOVENIA
Stegne 11
SI-1000 Ljubljana
Phone: +386 (0)1 / 513 8100
Fax: +386 (0)1 / 513 8170
Beijer Electronics AB
SWEDEN
Box 426
SE-20124 Malmö
Phone: +46 (0)40 / 35 86 00
Fax: +46 (0)40 / 35 86 02
Econotec AG
SWITZERLAND
Hinterdorfstr. 12
CH-8309 Nürensdorf
Phone: +41 (0)44 / 838 48 11
Fax: +41 (0)44 / 838 48 12
GTS
TURKEY
Darülaceze Cad. No. 43 KAT. 2
TR-34384 Okmeydanı-Istanbul
Phone: +90 (0)212 / 320 1640
Fax: +90 (0)212 / 320 1649
CSC Automation Ltd.
UKRAINE
15, M. Raskova St., Fl. 10, Office 1010
UA-02002 Kiev
Phone: +380 (0)44 / 494 33 55
Fax: +380 (0)44 / 494-33-66
MITSUBISHI
ELECTRIC
FACTORY AUTOMATION
EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES
Kazpromautomatics Ltd.
Mustafina Str. 7/2
KAZ-470046 Karaganda
Phone: +7 7212 / 50 11 50
Fax: +7 7212 / 50 11 50
CONSYS
Promyshlennaya st. 42
RU-198099 St. Petersburg
Phone: +7 812 / 325 36 53
Fax: +7 812 / 325 36 53
ELECTROTECHNICAL SYSTEMS
Derbenevskaya st. 11A, Office 69
RU-115114 Moscow
Phone: +7 495 / 744 55 54
Fax: +7 495 / 744 55 54
ELEKTROSTILY
Rubzowskaja nab. 4-3, No. 8
RU-105082 Moscow
Phone: +7 495 / 545 3419
Fax: +7 495 / 545 3419
NPP "URALELEKTRA"
Sverdlova 11A
RU-620027 Ekaterinburg
Phone: +7 343 / 353 2745
Fax: +7 343 / 353 2461
KAZAKHSTAN
RUSSIA
RUSSIA
RUSSIA
RUSSIA
MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES
ILAN & GAVISH Ltd.
24 Shenkar St., Kiryat Arie
IL-49001 Petah-Tiqva
Phone: +972 (0)3 / 922 18 24
Fax: +972 (0)3 / 924 0761
ISRAEL
AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE
CBI Ltd.
Private Bag 2016
ZA-1600 Isando
Phone: + 27 (0)11 / 928 2000
Fax: + 27 (0)11 / 392 2354
SOUTH AFRICA
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. /// FA - European Business Group /// Gothaer Straße 8 /// D-40880 Ratingen /// Germany
Tel.: +49(0)2102-4860 /// Fax: +49(0)2102-4861120 /// [email protected] /// www.mitsubishi-automation.com